Toshiba 46HM94 DLP Television Owner's Manual

TOSHIBA
HM94(E)O02-04
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV. This manuaHwflH heHpyou use the many exciting features of your new TV.
Before operating the TV, please read this manual completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.
Safety Precautions
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF FiRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK,
DO
NOT EXPOSE
THiS APPLIANCE
TO RAiN OR
MOISTURE°
WARNmNG: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRmC $ROCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR RACK),NO USER-
QUALiFiEDSERVICEPERSORREL,Thisappliesto al! items exceptthese specifiedonpages98-100ef this
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (:servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance,
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE!
/_
The temperature of the mamp
!_,J_
irereediately after ase exceeds
392°F (20O°C}°
Touching
the
/ ff
_
_
'_ tamp before it has cooled wmmlresumtin severe bums° ALLOW
\
THE LAMP TO COOL FOB AT LEAST ONE (m)HOUR BEFORE
REPLACINGIT.
The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The length of service life varies depending on product use and user settings.
If you use the lamp beyond its service life:
• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should rephce the lamp unit; and
. the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp wifl be reduced and the lamp may rupture.
If the lamp raptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is repIaced.
Note:
The brnp unit is designed
so broken !amp gbss
remains secure/y inside the/arnp
uni_
See "Larep unit
repiaeereent
amJ care" on pages 98-100.
• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area,
NOte: The lamp unit contains memu_%
Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities ol the Electronic
Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
2
/
o
HOTE: NEVEH CONHECT THiS
TO
A PEHSONAL COMPUTEH (PC).
', THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WlTH A PC.
N_iCE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND iNSTABiLiTY
CAUTION: This temevision is for use
onmy
with the Toshiba stand misted bemowo Use with other carts or stands is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury.
Television Stand Model
46H M94
52HM94
ST4694, ST4684
ST5294, ST5284
62H M94 ST6294, ST6284 h_ Canada, please contact your authorized Toshiba dealer or visit the Toshiba Canada web site at www.toshiba.ca
to determine the appropriate stand re1 your television.
NOTE TO CATV iNSTALLERS IN THE UoSoAo
This is a reminder to call the CATV system mstaller's attention to Article
820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical For additional antenna grounding mformatioe, see items 27 and 28 orb page 4.
ChiM
Safety
Jt Makes A Differeuce
Where Your TV Stauds
Congratulations on your purchase!
As you enjoy your new TV, keep these safety tips in reind:
The Issue
© If you are like most consumers,you have a Tt/in your home.Many homes, in fact, have morethan oneTV,
© Tile hometheater entertahlmentexperience is a growingtrend, and Larger
T_s ate popuhr purchases however,they are not alwayssupported on the properTV stands.
© SometimesT_s are improperlysecuredor inappropriately situated on dressers,bookcases,shelves,desks, audio speakers, chests, or carts. As a result,TVsmayfail over,caushlg unnecessal7 injury,
We Care!
© Tile consumerelectronicsindustry is committed to makinghome entertainmentenjoyableand safe.
© The ConsumerElectronicsAssociationformed the pport SafetyCommittee,comprised of TV and consumerelectronicsfurniture manufacturers,to advocatechildren's safety and educateconsumersand their families about televisionsafety.
Tune into Safety
© One sizedoes NOTfit all! Use appropriatefurnkure largeenough to support the weight of your TV (and other electroniccomponents).
© Useappropriateangle braces,straps,and anchorsto secureyour furniture to the wal! (but neverscrew any[hingdirectly into the TV).
© Carefullyread and understand the other enclosedinstructionsfor proper use of this product.
© Do not allow children to climb on or playwith furniture and TVs.
© Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR,renlotecontrol, or toy] that a curiouschild may reachfor.
© Rememberthat children can become excitedwhile watching a prog_anl and can potentiallypush or puff a TV over.
© Shareour safetyulessageabout this hidden hazardof the llome with your family and friends. Thank you!
2500 Wilson BIvd
Arlington, VA 22201 U.SA
1el 703_907-7600 Fax703-907-7690 www.CE,org
CEAis the Sponsol: Pmducer and
Managerof rile Intem:lrion:lrOES_
2
÷
10/27/04, 3:51 PM
÷
F
HM94(E)002-04
[mportant Safety [nstructions
0
Read these
instructions.
2]
Keep these
instructions.
s]
Heed aH warnings.
4]
Follow all instructions.
5]
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6]
Clean only with a dry cloth.
7]
Do not block any ventilation openings.
Insta[I in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not install near any beat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9] Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
Wideplug two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety'.
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consuk an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outiet.
10] Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at pIugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where it exits the apparatus.
11 ) Only use attachments/accessories manufacturer.
specified by the
12) Use onmy with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13] Unplug this apparatus during [ightnhlg storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14] Refer aH servicing to qualified service personnel
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-suppIy cord or pIug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. This applies to a[[ items except those specified on pages 98-100 of this manual.
15)
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of etectric shock, do not use the poIarized piug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the bIades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure.
16)
WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project the picture, and requires special safety precautions:
° See pages 98-100 for instructions on [amp unit replacement and care.
o DO NOT attempt to service this product
except
as specified on pages 98-100.
The only user-serviceable item in this product is the [amp unK.
hlstallation, Care, and Service
installation
Foilow these recommendations and precautions and heed all warnings when installing your TV:
17] Never modify' this equipment.
Changes or modifications may void: a) the warranty', and b) the user's authority to operate this equipment under the mles of the Federal
Communications Commission.
18)
DANGER: RiSK OF SERmOUS PERSONAL raNJURY, DEATH, OR EQUmPMENT
DAMAGE. _Never place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV may fail, causing serious personal injury, death, or sedous damage to the TV.
19] Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).
20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.
21] Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled with liquid, or candies on top of the TV.
22] Always place the back of the television at least one (1] inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to allow proper ventilation.
23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:
* on a bed, sofa, rag, or similar surface;
, too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or
* in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet, or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.
24] Never allow anything to rest on or rotI over the power cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is subject to wear or abuse.
25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power source only.
(conlinued on next padej
3
÷
3
8/30/04,10:58 AM
÷
F
HM94(E)O8
4
-04 hlatallatioll (bontinued frem previous page.1
27] Always make sure the antenna system is properly
28] grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the
National Electric Code].
Electricservice equbment ..
DANGER: RiSK OF SERmOUS
PERSONAL
raN OR DEATH!
Use extreme care to make sure you are never in a position where your body (or any item you are in contact with, such as a ladder or screwdriveO can accidentally touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.
o Never attempt to install any of the following during
lightning activity: a] an antenna system; or b] cables, wires, or any home theater component connected to an antenna or phone system.
Care
Ground clamps j Antenna leadqrt wire collductors
(NECSection 810-21)
• _-"_
_Powel service grounding electrode system (NECAR 250 Part H)
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSH I BA
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
Care
(continued from previous column)
33} For added protection of your TV from lightning and power surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.
34} During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the unit is being turned on or of[ If these sounds become frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
35} Special care for
DLP T_
(digital light processing[ units:
• Lamp-The lamp in this product has a limited service life.
The length of service life varies depending on product use or user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its service life:
- you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of the picture, at which time you should replace the lamp unit; and
- the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is replaced.
See "Lamp unit replacement and care" on pages 98-100.
Note:
, The lamp unit is designed
so broken lamp glass remains
securely inside the lamp unit.
The lamp unit contains memury
Disposal of mercury
may be regulated due to environmental
considerations.
For disposal or recycling
information, please contact
your local authorities
or
the Electronle
Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
o Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved
method for yotf! area.
29] Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove the source of reflections while viewing the TV.
30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry' cloth.
Do not spray volatile compounds such as insecticide on the cabinet. This may cause a discoloration or damage of the cabinet.
30
WARI_mNG: RmSK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into the TV cabinet slots.
32] If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when the TV is first delivered}, condensation may form on the
lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to
7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.
Sewice
36}
WARNING:
RiSK OF ELECTR|C SHOCK!
Never attempt to service the TV yourself, except as specified on pages 98-100.
Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow tMs
WARN I NG may result in death or serious injuly. Refer atI servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized
Service Center.
37} If you have the TV serviced:
Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts specified by the manufacturer:
Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.
38} When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.
Note: The lamp unit contains memury. Disposal of memury may
be regulated due lo environmental
condderadons.
Dispose of
the used lamp unit by the approved method
for your area.
For disposa! or recycling infbmTation, please contact your local
autho/:ities or the Electronic
Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
÷
4
÷
8/30/04,10:58 AM
[
A
÷ [
The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may become dark or black, or the lamp may fail, at which time you must replace the lamp unit. See "Lamp unit replacement and care" on pages 98-100.
2)
Each time you turn on the TV, it may take severa! seconds to go from no picture to full picture brightness.
S)
The display on this TV is manufactured using a chip that may contain Lipto 1.3 million microscopic mirrors. Each of these micromirrors measures less than one-fifth the width of a human hair and represents a single pixel on the television display.
These micromirrors are nmtmted on tiny hinges that enable them to titlt either toward the light source [ON) or away from it (OFF). Occasionally, one of these mirrors may become inoperative, creating a light or dark pixel on the projection surface. This is a structural property of DLP TMprojection TV technology, and is not a sign of malfunction.
Such pixels are not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance (see item 29 on page 4).
4)
Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a "rainbow effect" on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this type, and is not a sign of TV malfunction.
5) Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and as directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be affected by your viewing position and Length of viewing time. If you sit too closely to the TV for too Long,you may stiffer from eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.
This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the intema!
temperature.
You may be able to hear the fans for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a function of the Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown mode and is not a sign of TV malfunction.
You can set the Quick Restart feature to stop the fans as soon as the TV is turned off See
"SeLecting the Quick Restart feature" on page 50.
7) The green and red LED Lights on the contro! touchpad (on the lower right corner of the TV screen) indicate your TV's current status. If either light flashes, see "LED indications" on page 94 for details.
8) Review all safety and operating information in this owner's mantra[ before you use your TV.
The DLP logo and DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Important Safety Information .............................................2=4
Important notes about yoar BLP projection TV .................5
Chapter 1: hRrodtmtion ..........................................................7
Welcome to Toshiba ...........................................................
7
Features o_'your newTV ....................................................
7
Overview of steps ['or insrMlilng, setting up, and
using yo_r new TV ......................................................
8
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ............................................9
TV front touchpad andsidepanelcontrols and connections .............................................................
9
TV back pand connections ................................................
10
Overview of cable types ......................................................
11
About the connection illustrations ......................................
12
Connecting a digital CableCARD'".
...................................
12
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV
(no Cable box) ...............................................................
13
Connecting a camcorder .....................................................
13
Com_ecfing a VCR and Cable box .....................................
14
Connecting a VCR and sate[lke receiver .............................
15
Com_ecting a DVD player with Swideo, a VCR, and a CabLebox ..............................................................
16
Connecting a DVD player with Co[orStreamv'
(component video) and a VCR .......................................
17
Connecting two VCRs
.......................................................
18
Connecting an HDMI _" or a DVI device to d_e
HDMI input
..................................................................
19
Connecting a digital audio system
......................................
20
Connecting an analog audio system ....................................
20
ControLling infrared remote-controlLed devices through tile TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 21
Con netting IEEE- 1394 video devices ................................. 22
Using analog-compatibLe IEEE-1394 devices .................. 22
Supported signals ...........................................................
22
Using TheaterNet on-screen device control .................... 22
Connecting an AVHD or D-VHS recorder .................... 23
IEEE-1394 device initialization ...................................... 23
IEEE-1394 device management ..................................... 24
G-LINK _''connection ........................................................
25
Chapter
3: Using the remote control .................................
26
Learning abotJt the remote controL .....................................
26
Installing the remote control batteries .................................
27
Using the remote control MODE button to control your other dexices ...........................................................
Remote Control flmcdona[ key chart .................................
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices ...........................................................
Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................
27
28
3(1
32
Chapter
4: Nenu tayoat and navigation ...........................
34
Main menu Layout ..............................................................
34
Setup/Instalhtion menu hyout ...........................................
35
Navigating the menu system ...............................................
35
Chapter
5: TV Gaide On Screen
TM system setup ............. 36
TV Guide On Screen reminder ..........................................
39
Chapter 6: Setting ap year TV .............................................40
Selecting the menu language ...............................................
40
Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 4(1
Dogramming channels into the TV's channd memory ....... 41
Progranlming channels automatically .......................... 41
ManualLyadding and deLetingchannels in the dlanne[ memory .....................................................
42
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ION, All rights reserved.
5
÷
A
÷ L
Programming your fhvorite channeh .................................. 45
Setting up and using TheaterNet
TM on screen device control .................................................................
44
Setting up TheaterNet .................................................
44
Using the TheaterNet control icons ............................. 45
TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 46 48
Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 49
Setting the HDMF" audio mode ........................................ 49
Setting the time and date ....................................................
49
Viewing tile CableCARI_)
TM menu ...................................... 50
Setting the Quick Restart feature ........................................ 50
Viewing the digital signal meter .........................................
51
Viewing the system status ...................................................
51
Chapter 7: Using the
IV
Guide On Screen
TM interactive program guide ...............................................
52
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system ....................... 52
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system ...................... 53
TV Guide On Screen remote control functions .......... 53
Video Window ...........................................................
54
Panel Menus ...............................................................
54 hffo Box......................................................................
55
TV Guide On Screen ]cons .........................................
55
TV Guide On Screen Services ............................................
56
LISTINGS screen .......................................................
56
SEARCH screen ..........................................................
57
RECORDINGS screen ...............................................
59
SCHEDULE screen ....................................................
60
Record fbatures ...........................................................
60
Remind fbatures ..........................................................
62
SETUP screen .............................................................
64
Change system settings ..........................................
64
Change channel display .........................................
64
Change def'au[t options ..........................................
65
Chapter g:
Using the gV's features .................................... 66
Selecting the video input source to view
.............................
66
Labeling the video input sources .........................................
67
Tuning channds .................................................................
68
Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 68
Using SpeedSurf to change to a specific programmed channel ..............................................
68
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or unprogrammed) ......................................................
68
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return ......................................................
68
Switching between two channels using
SurfLock". ..............................................................
68
Selecting the picture size .....................................................
69
Natural picture size .....................................................
69
TheaterWide °_'1 picture size ........................................ 70
TheaterWide °_'2 picture size ........................................ 70
TheaterWide °_'3 picture size ........................................ 70
Full picture size ...........................................................
70
Scrolling the TheaterWide ')picture .................................... 71
Using the auto aspect ratio _bature ...................................... 71
Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 72
Selecting the hmp mode ....................................................
72
Using the POP f'eatures ......................................................
73
Using the POP double-window f'eatm:e....................... 75
6
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORAXION.
All rights reserved,
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 74
Freezing the main picture in the
POP double-window ..............................................
74
POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 75
Using the favorite channeI scan })ature ........................ 75
Adjusting the picture ..........................................................
76
Sdecting the picture mode ..........................................
76
Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 76
Resetting the picture settings ....................................... 76
Using CableC[ear
TM
DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 77
Sdecting the color temperature ................................... 77
Resetting the advanced picture settings ....................... 77
Using the closed caption mode ...........................................
78
Advanced closed captions ............................................
78
Digital closed captions ................................................
78
Adiusting the audio ............................................................
79
Muting the sound .......................................................
79
Digital audio selector ..................................................
79
Sdecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 79
Adjusting the audio quality .........................................
80
Using the StableSound
TM f'eature .................................. 80
Resetting your audio adjustments ................................ 80
Turning offthe built-in speakers ................................. 81
SeJecting the optical audio output f'ormat ................... 81
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player .............................................................................
82
Memmy card specifications .........................................
82
Using the IPEG picture viewer .................................... 85
Using the MP3 audio phyer ....................................... 84
Memory card care and handling .................................. 85
Using the Game Mode feature ............................................
85
Setting the ON/OFF timer ................................................
86
Setting the sleep timer ........................................................
86
Displaying TV setting infbrmation on-screen ..................... 87
Understanding the auto power offfeature ........................... 87
Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 87
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ......................................
88
Entering the PIN code .......................................................
88
If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 88
Changing your PIN code ...................................................
88
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (\7-Chip) ......... 89
Blocking channds ...............................................................
90
Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 9{}
Locking video inputs ..........................................................
9{)
Using the GameTimer
TM
.....................................................
91
Using the front pane[ lock _)atm:e....................................... 91
Chapter 10: TrouMeshooting ...............................................
92
General troubleshooting .....................................................
92
LED indications .................................................................
94
TV Guide On Screen FAQs ......................................... 95 97
Chapter 11: Appendix ...........................................................
98
Lamp unit replacement ..............................................
98 100
Specifications ...................................................................
lO1
Limited United States _._rranty .......................................
102
Limited Canada "g}qu:ranty 103
HM94(E)O0. _06(Notes&TOC) 6 _ 8/30/04,1:01 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
Welcometo Toshiba
Thank you fbr purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most irmovafive DLP _'_'projecdoo TVs on the market. The goal of this rnanual is to guide you through setting up md oper _fing your TV as quickly as possible
, This manual applies to modeIs 46HM94, 52HM94, md 62HM94. Befbre you start reading, check d_e modal number on d_e back of your TV.
Instructions in this manuaI are based
on
using the remote control You _lso can use the contro[s on the TV front toud_pad if they have the same name as those refbrred to on d_e remote control
The side pand and back pand provide termina[s fbr connecting od_er equipment to your TM See page 9 fbr f'ront touchpad and side pand details. See page 10 fbr back pand derails, See pages 12-25 fbr insmtcdons on connecting od_er devices to your TV.
Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefuJly_ and keep this manual for futt_e reference.
Featuresof your new TV
The fbHowing are just a fbw oldie many excking fbamres of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP projection TV:
• Integrated digital tuning (SVSB ATSC and QRM) eIiminates the need f'or a separate digkal converter set-top box (in most cases).
° $V Guide On Screen °_'no-}'eeinteractive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).
° Digital CableCARD '_' module skit f'or viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 12).
° Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digkal recording device or a ]bshiba Symbio'" 160HD4 Andio/Video Hard Drive
Recorder m one of'the IEEE-1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definkion material tCromeither tuner (page 23).
(page 83) and _br playing MP3 files (page 84).
° TheaterNet'' icons fi_r(m-screen control (if'external iR and iEEE=1394 devices (page 44).
• Two mE[[-1394 ports }i_rmulti-device cormection and control
(page 22).
• HDNm/DVI digka[, high-definition multimedia inter_ce (page 19).
• Two sets of ColorStream °'_HD high-reso[ufion cornponent video inputs (pages 15 and 17).
• Doiby _ Digital* (page 2(t) and
SRS'"
WOW (page 81) audio technologies.
• DigitN Audio Out optical audio connection (page 20),
• Game Node feature for shorter frame de_ayswhen p_aying high-action video Barnes (page 85).
• CaMeCmear*MDNR digital pica*re noise reduction (page 77).
• Double-window POP (page 73) and muLl-window Favorites (page 75) features.
In the United States. TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemslar TV Guide international, inc. and/er one of its affiliates, In Canada, -[V GUIDE is a regislered mark of Transcontinental inc., and is (ised under license by Gemslar TV Guide International. Inc. ]be TV Guide On Screen system is mal_utactured under license frent Gemstar TV Guide
International. Inc and/or one of its affiliales. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more d the following issued United Stales patel/ts: 6,498,895, 6.418.556, 6,331,877,
6,239,794, 6,154,203, 5,940.073.4.908.713. 4.751.578. 4.706.121,
IND. AND!OR ITS RELATEDAFFIUATESAND/OR TOSHmBAANERmDA CONSUNER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.ARE NOT
PROVIDED BY THE iV GUIDE ON SCREENSYSTEN. IN NO
° A recordingdeviceis requffsdfor recording.Over<heair or cableaccessto stationscarryingTB GuideOn Screendatais req_[redfor the TVGuideOn Screensyslemto operate,TV
°This productincorporatescopyrightpretecfiontechnologythatis proLectedbyUS, patentsand otherintelleclualprepedyrights.Useofthis copyrightprotectiontechnologymustbe authorizedbyMacrevisionand is intendedfor homeandother limitedpay per view usesonly.unlessotherwiseauthorizedby MacrevisionReverseengineeringor disassemblyis p_shibited.
° SRSWOW,SRSandthe(@) logo aretrademarksd SRSLabs.Inc, SRSWOWtechnologyis incorporatedunderlicensefrvm]SRSLabs.Inc
° *ManufacluredunderlicensefremDolbyLaboratoriesDolbyandthe double-Dlogo areregisteredtrademarksof DolbyLaboratories,
° SmartMediais a registeredtlademarkofPosNbaCorporagon
, SDis a trademarkd SDCardAssociation
, MemoryStick is a trademarkd SonyCorporation
Copyright O 2004 "FOSH[BA CORPOR_J[ON, All rights reserved.
7
8/30/O4, 1:41 PM
HM94(E/OO7-O8(1-1ntro) 7
[
÷
Overview of steps for instNJing,setting up, and using your new TV
Follow these steps to set up your TV md begin using its mmy exciting features.
1 Carefully read the important safety, installation, care, and service information on pages 2-5. Keep this manual for future reference.
2. Observe the following wben cboosing a location for tbe TV:
° Place the TV on the floor or on the optiona! TV stand listed in the "Specifications" section (page 101]=
NOTIC[
OF
P0$$1BL[_ N'A_II}NENNLITY
BANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
OR [)EATR! Usethis TV only with the TOSHIBA TV stand listed in the "Specifications" section _age 101). Use with other stands may result in instability, causing possible injury or death.
12 See "Menu layout and navigation" for a quick overview of navigating the TV's menu structure (pages 34 35).
13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen _ system (if avaibble in your area).
Note: The TV Guide Ol_Screen pregrara guide opens automatically
when you turo ol_ the Tg
Todisable this feature:
75 PressTV GUIDE of?the remote eontml t_ oper_dye7//
2j Usethe _ _ buttons t(?selectthe SETUPmenu
3_ Usethe ,AT buttons t_ sdect CHANGEDEFAULT
° Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the screen.
. Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow ploper ventilation, hadequate ventilation may cause ovelheating, which will damage the TV.THiS TYPE OF
DAMAGE iS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA
WARRANTY.
o Read "ff_stallatiorPon pages 3 4.
. Read "Important notes about your DLP TV" on page 5
3.
Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have cor_nectedall cables and devices to your TV.
4_
BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, meal the functions of the TV's connections and controls (pages 9 and 10)
5_
Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV
(pages 12 25).
6_
Connect the G-LiNK
TM cable (either one of the enclosed
I R blaster cables) fl-omyour VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable) to the G LINK jack so you carl use the TV Guide On Screen_ features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 25.
7
h_stamm
in the remote control (page 27).
8
See "Learnh_g about the remote control" (page 26) for an overview of the buttons on the remote control
9
Program the remote control to operate your other device(s:} (pages 27 33).
10.
AFTER connecting all cables and devices, power cords for your TV and other devices.
plug
ill the
11.
After you plug in the TV power cord, the green LED (on the TV front touchpad, to the lett of the POWER button) will blink 3 times. \/V_itabout 30 seconds until the green LED lights continuously arid then press POWER on the TV front touchpad or remote control
See "LEDindications" on page 94.
4) Usethe _,_' buttons t_)sdect GENEML DEFAULT
0P770,_ and thenpressENTER
5) Set the AUTO GUIDE option to OFF
8j Usethe _,_f buttons to sdect DON_ andllyenpress
ENTER
14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen
TM program guide (if available in youl _iea).
• When us/?l,qIhe TV Guide ()r_Sc'reer_sjzstemto feeof_Ja
pro,gram for t!_efirst tfm¢ it/s recommended tl_at
you
• ff the TVpower co_db unplug'Bedf_van extd_dedpetard of
(powerco/d plugged b andpower OFE_to downbad the
entire TVGuideOf7Selr_J?pm,qramsdledu/e Be sure to
on psge 39
15. Program channels into the TV's channel memory
(page 41).
lf; Set up tbe TheaterNet
TM on-screen device controJ feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system components) (page 44).
17 For details on using the memory card ]PEG picture
viewer
and NP3 audio player, see page 82.
18. }:or details on using tbe TV's features, see Cbapter 8.
19 }:or hemp,refer to the Troubmesbooth_gGuide (Chapter
20 }:or tecbnicN specifications, see Cbapter 11.
21 }:or warranty information, see Chapter 11.
22. Enjoy your new TV!
Copyright (d)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
HM94(E)O07 08(1-1ntro)
8 _ 8/30/O4, 1:41 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
TV front touchpad and side panelcontrNsand connections
Front of TV
Side panel
Reset button
NMC
Remote sensor
@
TA_ _,
®
MENU
®
POWER
@
L
TV/VIDEO EXIT _
Channel _&
®
_
Volume 4 _-
®
*Gent/}/touch the printed keys on the touchpad.
U
MENU
Green/Red LEDs
®
Right side of TV
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO3 IN
@
Memory card
slots
@
(_) Remote
sensor (behind the scrserO -Point the
remoEe
controJ toward this area of the TV
screen.
See "Remo_e control ef'_bctiverange" on page 26.
® TWVJDEO -- Repeatedly press to change the source you are viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
HDMI, Color&ream HD1, ColorStream HD2).
®
EXIT --
Press to dose m on-screen memt inst mr?.
® ARROWS _"_ _ -- When a merm is on-screen, these bu_ons fimcdon as down/up/lef}/right menu navigation buKons_
®
MENU --
Press to access the menu system (see page 34).
When a *nenu is on-screen or the TV Guide On Screen program guide is open, this button f'tmc_ions as the ENTER btttton,
®
®
®
POWER-- Press to turn the TV on and off.
CHANNEL _ --
When no mem_ is on-screen, these buttons change the channd (programmed channeIs only; see page 41). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons f'uncdon as up/down menu navigation buttons.
VOLU_
E _t } --When no menu is onoscreen, these buttons adjust the volume leveI. When a mem_ is on-screen, these buttons f'uncdon as lef'drigh_ menu navigation btttgons_
®
6reem_
a__d Red EEDs -When green lights solid
(no[ blinking), it indicates that the
TV power cord is pIugged in and the power is OFE This is caIDd standby mode.
Note: When you f#atp/ILqin the power cord. the green LED will blink
3
fifties After appmximatdy 30 seconds,ihe green
LED will @ht
cafltir_tJOLgS/}/,
at whichpo//ltyau canpress
POWERto turn ON the TX
When red lights solid (not blir_king), it indicates that the
TV power cord is ph*gged in and the POWER is ON.
See "LED indications" on page 94 fi.)radditional in_brmafion.
@ RESET -If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn offthe TV, press this bu_on to rese_ the TM
the eodera pape/ c//por simb_rcDlect to pressthe but&v;
@ VlDEO-3 -- The side pane[
A/V connections are refbrred to as "VIDEO 3" and include standard A/V connections plus opdonaI SMdeo.
(The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V connections are on the TV's back panel; see page 10.)
@ _emory card slots -Insert a memory card into one of the memory card sk)ts to view JPEG rids (such as photos) as a "sIide show" on your TV or listen to MP3 audio rids
(see page 82).
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFIPOBA_ION, All rights reserved.
9
HM94(E}OO9-11 (2A-Cnct) 9
÷
8/30/04, 1:39 PM r
÷
TV back panN connections
For m exp_armtion ofc_b_e wpes see p_ge 11.
®® © @
v v
(9
® ®
@ ANT-1 ((;ABLE) IN and AN'I=2 IN -- Two inputs that support anaIog (NTSC) and digit _ (ATSC) of}:-airantemm signals and analog and digit _I(QAM) Cable TV signaIs.
Note:
If you have art antenna on/)/, connect it to ANT 7 ff you have
both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cnb/e F1/to ANT Z and
the
afTteYiYla
to
ANT;
@ VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN --Two sets ofs_andard
(composite) video and standard audio inputs p[us opdot_al
Swideo inputs fbr cotmecting devices with composite video or S-video output.
on/;/video b_)frnation; sepm_te
cofrg)/ete
COl_nect/ol_
_)fa
@ Coin(Stream ® H[_)-I and Co|orS(ream ® HD-2 -- Two sets of'CoIorStream °')high-definition comporlent video and standard stere() attdio inputs fbr com_ecting devices with comporlent vide() output, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream?
See pages 15 and 17.
Note: Component video cab/e'_ caf?y ong video informaffon,
separate atJd/o cables am t_ciui/_d for a complete coflfTeot/of?
@ AiV OUT -- Standard composite vide() arid analog audio outputs _br com_ecdng a VCR _br editing and dubbing. See page 18 _br details.
@ V_riable Audio OUT -- Stand _rd analog audio outputs fbr cotmecting an analog amplifier with external speakers.
See page 20.
@ Digital Audio OUT -- Optical audio output in Dolby
Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) fbrmat ;¢br cormecting an external Doiby Digital decoder, amplifier,
AV receiver, or home theater system with optical audio input. See page 20.
(Z) G-LINK'" -- For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/
G-LINK cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen_) recording fbamres. See page 25.
@ TheaterNet '' (IR) OUT -- For controlling infrared remo_e--controHed devices through the TV. You can cormect up to r\vo devices with either one of the encIosed IR bIaster cables, and then control the devices using the TV's IR passthrough or TheaterNet"
(on--screen device control) l::eatures.
See pages 21 and 44.
@ Standard Audio IN -- For use when cormecting a DVI device with ana[og audio output to the HDMI input. See page 19. Also see item 10 bdow.
@ HDMF" IN -- High-Defirfifion Multimedia h_tedi_ce inpu_ receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video
fi'om ar_HDMI device or uncompressed digital video _)'oma
DVI device. See page 19.
NOTE:NEVERCONNECTTHISTV TOA PERSONAL
COMPUTER (PC).
(_) IEEEq394 --Two hi--directional digital IEEE-1394 ports
_br conr_ecting mukiple devices with compressed digital vide(). Because these ports are hi-directional, they can be used _br playback and recording. You can control your
IEEE-1394 devices using the TV's The _terNet on-screen control icons. See pages 21-24 and 44.
NOTE:
* IE_ L5'94 c';ff)/e c'afr/es both audio 8f_d video ir_f()_7718tiof_,
no se/)sml_
8u5t/o cabbs 8_
f_qtJited
for a cr)(l_pbte coflnect/of?
* NEVERCONNECTTHISTV TOA PERSONAL.
COMPUTER (PC).
This T1/ is not intended for use with F] PC
@ CabJeCARDrM dot -- For use with a digital security c_rd and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages 12 and 50.
HDMI. the HDMI logo, and High Definition Multimedia interfaceare trademarks or registeredtiademarks of HDMI Licensing,LLC,
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable ]_levision Laboratories, Inc
Copyright (d)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
HM94(E)O09
0
10 _ 8/30/04, 1:39 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
Overview d cane types
THINS
1
TV
m
TO A PF.R$OmAL COMPUT[R
(PC),
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.
Note: Two duahwand /R bh_stet/G L/IV/( cables af_ /fTr/uded with yau/ TI/ All other requhed cv2_/es,
ff not provided with your other dev/res, cnn be puf(-hased at many electe)rffre accesso/y suppliers
@ Coaxial (F_type) cable is used f()r colmecting and/or cable converter box to the ANT-1 your anterma, and/or ANT-2 RF c_b[e TV seta, ice, inputs on your
TV.
• Standard AiV cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are fbr use wkh video devices wkh st mdard audio and st md _rd
(composke) video output.
These cables (and the rdated irlputs on your TV) are vpica[ly color--coded accord/rig to use: yellow fbr video, red fbr stereo right audio, and whke fbr stereo [e_?
(or mane) audio.
• S-vldeo cable is fbr use wkh video devices wkh S-video output.
Separate audio cables are req_fired fk)r a complete connection.
Note: AR S v/c/eo cable pmv/(/es be_ef picture peffom_ance i'han a composite v/(/eo c_,'b/e
@
@
@
Coa×ial
{F=type) sable
8tandard A/V cables {red/white/yellow}
S-video sable
Component video cables(red/green/blue
of tile pk;'tum peffomTanre /viii be urlaocept_bb
• Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use wkh vide() devices wkh component video output, (ColorStre m__)is Toshiba's brand of comporient vide().)
These cables are vpicaHy co[or<oded red, green, and blue.
Separate audio cables are required for a complete cormection.
Note:
(;omponent
video c>_b/esprovide better p/ctu/_ peff(mrmnce thai? a st;md;_fd (composite)
vkleo or S vk/eo cable
HDM] cable is fbr use wkh devices v&h HDMI (high--deft(titian multimedia inter[_tce) output.
HDMI cable deIivers digital audio and vide() in its native [_)rmat.
This cable carries both video and audio irdbrmafiom therefbre, r_o separate audio c _bles are required for a complete HDMI device cormecfion.
See page 19 [br [:_rther details.
_uobwand IR Naater/R=LNR sable
{2 insluded)
S v/(/eocable
IEEE-1394 cable is _br use wkh video devices with compressed digital vide() output d_at meets CEA specifications fbr IEEEq394.
This cabIe carries both video and audio irdbrmafiom d_erefbre, no separate audio cables are required fbr a complete cotmecfion.
See pages 22-24.
Note:
•
The t/>)nsm/_e/oncapability oflEE_
t394 ruble i_eed with this T1/must be
$400
(400 Mbps max/muf_O
• /EEE t394 cobb provides bette/p/ctaf_ pel_)fmar_ce thai7 a star_&ffd
(composite2 video of S video cable
• Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK '" cable is _br use wkh video devices wkh IR
(ird'rared) remo_e centre[. Two of these cables are inc[uded with your TV. One is _k)r cormecfior_ to the G-LINK jack (page 25) to enable TV Guide On Screen_' recording
_bamres (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used wkh d_e TV's IR passothrough
_bamre (page 21) and TheaterNet on-screen device centre[ _bamre (page 44).
Note:
The two/R bb)ste//(_ L/N/( cables/fldua'eg with yauf 73//)ave spec/Sc characteristics that a/Yewthem to e/aiR pfoper!y with tbia T1/_ /R OUT and G LiNK pelts Never use other
aftermarRet
_ blaster
or G-UNg cables with
this ?rg. Other cables 177ay
properly and can cre_se damage THiS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR
TOSHIBA WARRANTX
Optical audio cable is _)r cormecdr_g receivers wkh Do[by °')Digk_l or PCM
(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack. See page 2(}.
Optical audio sable
Note:
Although your TV includes bolh NDM/
and/EEE_394 connections, it may not
operate with anotf_er device you have 1#at
/nr'hJde_ssuch a (reinfection,/:?)r example, ff_e
/EEE-_394 paris af_ not intended to operale
w//h (u/Tent model Mini DV camcordef_, and tf_e NDM;
input is not intended for
(:anne(l/on to a compute/:
('opyfTght protection
mqe/remer?ls may also prohibit of
limit connechwT;z See page _9 for derails
about the NDMI
/npuL See pages 22-24
for
r/e_ta//sabout t#e /EEE-1394 pelts
Dolby is 8 registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories,
Copyright_) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
11
8/30/04, 1:39 PM
HM94(E)OO9-11 (2A-Cnct) 11
÷
A
+ L
You can connect dif'fbrent p.,,pesand brands of devices to your TV in se_era{dif_brent configurations. The connection iIRtstrations in this manual are representative of"b'pical de_ice connecuons only. The inpuUoutput jacks on your de_ices may dit}'er from those illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refbr to each de\ice's owner's manual
This digitaI television is capable of receiving anaIog basic, digital basic, and digital premium cane television programming by direct connection to a cane system providing such programming.
A securiV card (such as a digitaI CableCARD_'*), provided by
F)ur cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital programming.
Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program guide, and data-enhanced tdevision services) will not work with the use of a CaNeCARD and may require the use of"a separate set-top box fi'om your cable operator.
For more intbrmafion, call your local cable operator.
You will need:
+ one digital CableCARD (contact your cabD operator) digital cabD subscription ser_ice (contact your cable operator)
To view encrypted digital channels:
1. Connect your digita{ Cable TV cable to ANT!.
2. With the front of the CableCARD
TM fi_cingright, insert it into the CabDCARD sIot on the back of the TV (see illustration below lefr):
3. Af'ter the CableCARD is inserted, a CableCARD option appears in the APPLICATIONS menu, with infi)rmational screens provided by ),our digital CableCARD service. See page 50 for additional infi.}rmation.
NOTE: theEJECTbutton fwsoving
the@bleO_RD
•
IVever
object or c_ud (imh/dir_g,
without
limitation,a PCMC/Acnrc/)otherthai7a (}abb('ARD
+
AIw_ysmakesumthe('_@leCARDis_t;,c/rlgtbeconect c/i/_ctkm
•
ANT1only
•
A d@qta/cable subscgption £ r_qui/ed
to usea
&@IeCARD
(}OfTtUCt yOUY ()a/)/e
com[)ar_y
for inforyr+ation
•
fftbe
TI!
locks up with tbe C+ff/eCARD inset+d, press
the RESETbu_o/I on the 73//lorlt of urlp/d? the Tk' plug it b agab
arTd press POWE/Z
+
WTersugngaCa//eCARD, d}anndprog/x_mm/nc_
(page 4
0
£ unneeessafy because the Cg_bCARD automatically loach8the cable d_annd list bto the TV_
• The &_b/e('ARD will take several secon& to "pair" with
tbe T_ &_bleCARD /ntomTatkm and channd listings _1/i/I
riot be awfflable until this "pa//2lg" process is completed
CableCARD is a trademark o_'Cable Television Laboratories, lint.
Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)012
12
12 + 8/31/04,12:51 PM r
÷
A
÷ L
Connecting a VCRand antenna or CabJeTV (no CabJebox)
You will need: one coaxial cable one set of standard A/V cables
* For bette/pietu/e peitoe<lanc< if you/VCR has S video, use an
S vkleo cabb (plus rile audio cabbs:) instead of the stund_ffd video
cable HoweveL do not connect botl7 types of video cables to
VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2j at the same time or the picture
pefforTnanee winbe unaeceptabb
* ffyou have a mono I/CR connect L/MONO on the TV to your
VCR_ audio outjnek using tile whM audio cable only
To view the antenna
Turn OFF the VCR.
or Cable
sig!l_al:
Sdect the ANT 1 video inpur source.*
To view the VCR:
T, rn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video inpur source on the TV.*
._[itrn ON the VCR. Sdect the ANT 1 video input source.*
Tune the TV to cham_d 3 or 4 (whiche_er cham_d is vacant in your area).
To use the TV-Guide On Screen recording features:
1. Connect the G-UNK cable according to the instructions on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to d_e A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).
3. SeEd_e VCR to d_e appropriate Iirle input (refbr to your
VCR owner's manual fbr det:ails),and then turn Ot_F d_e
VCR.
4. See Chapcer 5 fbr deEailson seEdng up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See Chapcer 7 fi)r deEailson using the TV Guide
On Screen system.
Stereo VCFI
W
FromCaNeTV or antenna
R
Note:
2_e VIDEO/AUDiO
OUt_/?_cksoutput the s/iqna/sfrom the
ANT 7 ANT2 I/IDEO 1 VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3jacks when the approprtDte /bput mode is se/ectecZ
The unaatborized mcordiug, use, distribution, or revision of televisiou programs,
videotapes,
DVDs, aud other materials is p:'obibited under the
Copyright Laws of tbe United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal
liability,
Connecting a camcorder
You will need: one set:of standard A/V cables
* For bettel pletule peifoirrlanc< if yore cari?corUel has S video, use an
S video cable (plus UTeauciio cables;7instead of tile sl_snd_ffdvicieo c'_sble
DO I)Ot CostnectboW?81),5' video cable arid a st_oldiffd video cable 17)VIDEO
3 at the same time or tbe pk'tule peitoersance win be tJitaccef2bdt/e
To view the camcorder video:
Sdect: t:heVIDEO 3 video inpuE source.*
* Io select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control [see page 67).
Io program the PV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
8/31/04,12:51 PM
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 13
[
÷
A
÷ L
Connecting a VCRand Cable box
%u will need:
¢ one CaNe signal spotter five coaxial cables two sets of standard A/V cables
* For bette_ picttne peffoer_ance from youz VCR If your VCR has
S vide& connect an S-video cable (plus dTe auckb cnt@s3 instead
of the standard vkleo c@/e Do nor connect an S vkleo c_b/e and a s£ffldnfd video cabb i>_VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same f/?rle
or the picture perfoeTlance wi// be unac'cept_bb
* ffyouhaveamono
VOR connectL/MONOonthe
FVtoyour
VCRt_audio outj_ck usieg the whffe audio cable only
* For be:tel pictm_ peitoer?ance f/orTI you/Cable boy if your &_hle
box has componel2t video.
VOtJ
6";ff7CORReCt
cables Cph/srite auc#o cable..L_bsteild of the st;lndard video cable
from the Cabb box _ £ile Co/orS:ream HD 1 inputs on the 71/:@u
would tlTen sebct C'ok_rStmam
HD 7 as the video input SOLIfCe
*
Who/) you use 8 &sble box. you may not be able to use the
r_l?7ote
contTo/ the T_/
to Dlo_lelTi
or access
certain
featte_s on
D
To view basic Cable channels and use the _W'8 features:
Sdect the ANT 2 _ideo inpu_ source.* Use the TV front pand controIs or remote controI to change cham_ds and access the TV's tbatures,
C3
To view basic and premitml Cable channels:
Turn OFF the VCR. Selec_ daeANT 1 video input source.*
Tune the TV to channd 3 or 4 (whichever channd is vacant in your area). Use dae Cable box controls to change cha*mds,
OF.,
i[hm ON the VCR. Tm_e t[_eVCR to channel 3 or 4
(whichever channd is vacan_ in your area). Sdect the
VIDEO 1 vide<)input source.* Use the Cable box controls
to
change cham_ds,
To view the VCR:
Tftrn ON the VCR. SeJec_ the VIDEO 1 video softrce2 inpu_
Note: Thiswill providebetter picturepertonnanceLtvou
item on th£ pnge
or...Turn
ON the VCP,.. Select: the ANT 1 video inpft_ source.*
Tune the TV to cha*md 3 or 4 (whichever cha*md is vacant in your area).
* lb select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control
(see page 67). lb program the f_d remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.
Stereo VCR iN from ANT
FromCablel_/
Note:
_he VIDEO/AUDiO OUT,lacks ou@ut the s/_lna/s#ore the
ANT _ ANT2 I/IDEO _ VIDEO 2. or VIDEO 3j?_cks when the appropn?_te input mode £ selected_
[_ To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work with your cable box and to use the TV Guide
On Screen recording features:
1. Connect d_e G-LINK cable according to d_e instrucuons on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR is connec[ed to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (relbr to your
VCR owner's manual for detaiJs), and then mm OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for de_aiJson setting up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See Chapter 7 [br details
on
using the TV Guide
On Screen system.
The m_a_thorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of televisio_ programs,
videotapes,
DVDs, a_d other materials is prohibited u_der the
Copyright
Laws of the UnRed States a_d other countries, and may subject you to civi_ and criminal liability.
Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)012 25(2B-Cnct)
14 .
8/31/04, 12:52 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
Connecting
a
VCR
and
sateJJite receiver
Note:
The TV Guide On Screen _ system does not receive progrJn
StereoVCR
You will need:
_, three coaxial cables
_, one set ef cemper_er_t video cables (ifyour sateIIite receiver does r_e[ have cernpor_ent vide(), cotmec[ the standard A/V cables only) three sets of standard A/V cables
• f%r bette/picture peffonrlanc< ifyoln satellite
receiverand VCRhaveS video connect S vkleo
videocables Do not connectboth _/pesof video
cable i?)VIDEO 1(or I/IDEO 2) at the same fibrinor
the picture performancewinbe unacoe/:)tabb
From
antenna
T1/(VIDEO 0 _z)your VCR_AUDIO OUTjaek ushw
the whiteauogbcab/eon/_
D
To view satellite programs using the component video connections:
Sdec[ the ColerStream HD-! video input source on the TV.*
To view satellite programs using the standard
From satellite dish m video connections or to record satellite programs:
T, rn on a11three de, ices. Set
the
V(-;R to the appropriate litle irlput (refer te your. VCR owner's manual tbr details).
Sdect the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*
D
To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:
Turn ON the VCR. Sdec[ the ANT-! video input source
on
the TV.*
Tune the TV
to
cham_d 3 or 4 (whichever cham_d is vacant in your area).
Tttrn ON tl'_eV(-;R.Ttme tl',e VCR to the charme[ you war_tto watch. Sdect the VIDEO 1 _ideo input source on the TV.*
SateNtereceiver
Note: The VIDEO!AUDIO
OUTj?_cl<8output the s/}'na/8 from the
ANT 7,ANT2, I/IDEO L VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3y?mks when the appropn_te input mode is selected
* ]o select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control
(see page 67). ]o program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,
The
unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of televisioa programs, videotapes, BVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the UNrealStates and other countries, and may sobiect
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (retbr to >ur
VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See Chapter 7 [br details on using the TV Guide
On Screen system.
÷
HM94(E}012-25(2B-Cnct}
15
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:52 PM
15
F
A
÷ L
Connectinga DVDplayerwith S-video,a VCR,and a Cablebox
Fromantennaor CableiV
Y{m will need: five coaxial cables two sees of standard A/V cables
Note: Ifyou havea mono VCR,connectL/MONO on the 7T'
(VIDEO 7) toyouf VCR_aud/boutjack using the whM audio
cobb onl_
one S-video cabie one pair of standard audio cables
Note;
* Ifyour DVD plnyerdoesnot haveS vkleo,use a standard
videocable insteacLDo not connectan S video cnble anda
smnda/dvideo cobb to VIDEO 1CotVIDEO2) at the same
time or the picture
performance
WiN
* ffyourDI/Dpl_yerh_scompooentvideo, seepage ZZ
* Do not c'oonecttke DVD pl,hyerand VCRte the sameset of
StereoVCR
IbJ from ANT
OUT to TV
TV
connectedto VIDEO2)
To view basic channels and access the TV's features:
Sdect the ANT 2 _ideo inpuE source2 Use doe TV controls to change cha*mds and access the TV's features.
C3
To view preminm Cable channels:
Turn OFF the VCR. Sdect _heANT 1 video input source.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever charred is vacam in your area). Use the Cable box controls to change ci_a*mels.
()F.,
._fltrn ON the VCR. T_me the VCR to channd 3 or 4
(whichever charred is vacam in your area). Sdect the
VIDEO 1 video iplpm source.* Use the Cable box controls to change chaimds.
Note: When you use a Cable box, you rn_y not be able to
use the f_/770te control ih)prog/_m or access co/rain
[eatto_s
of} the TV
To view the DVD player:
Turn ON the DVD pkuer. Sdect the VIDEO 2 _ideo inpu_ source/
To view VCR 1:
T, rn ON the VCR. Select the VIDE() 1 video input source on the TV.*
or... Tttrn ON the VCR. Sdect the ANT 1 video inpu_ source.* Trine the TV to chapmel 3 or 4 (whichever cbapmel is vacant in your area).
* lo select the video input source, press [N PUT on the remote control
(see page 67). ]o program the 7_/remote contlol to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,
DVD pmayerwith S-video
Note:
7he VIDEO/AUDiO OUTj?_eks output the s/_!nalst/ om the ANT 1
ANT2` VIDEO L VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3j?_cks wheo the appmprgffe /?tput /node
is selected
To enable the TV Gnide On Screen system to wnrk with your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen
recording feanres:
1. Copmec_ the G-LINK cable according to the ip_str,cfions on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR is cormected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).
3. SeEthe VCR to the appropriate Iine inpu_ (refer to your VCR owner's manual for de,oils), and then turn OFF the VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 tbr details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See ChapEer 7 tbr details on using the TV Guide On Screen sysEeln,
The
unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of tdevision programs, videotapes,DVDs, a_d other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the U_ited States and other countries, a_d may subject yea to civiJ a_d crimi_a_ _iabi_ity,
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA) ION. A[] rights reserved.
HM94(E)012
6
16 _ 8/31/04, 12:52 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
Connectinga DVDplayerwith ColorStmam(componentvideo)anda VCR
Your TV has Co[orStrearn _*(component video) inputs.
Com_ecdng a DVD player with cornponer_t video outpuE (such as a Toshiba DVD player with Co[orStrearn '_) can grea@ enhance picture qua[it T,
You will need:
_' two coaxial cables
_, two sets of standard A/V cables
•
For
bertel pit'tul_ peffomlance, ifyoul VCRhas S video, _se an
videocable Howeve/;do not cof?f?ect
i)/f.)e_
of vkJeocnb/eto
VIDEO 1 (of VIDEO2) at tbe sametime or the picture
peffomTancewillbe unaccept_bb
• ffyou havea mono VCR,coffflect UMONO on/7?e71/
(VIDEO 0 re your VC)R_aud/boutjack using tile whM audio
cable only
_' one pair of standard audio cables
_, one see of component video cables
• X)u can connectthe componellt videocnb/es
(i)lus auc]k)
cables)from the DVD p/aye/to eitherset OfCO/OfStI_RIT?
]3*C/(S
Of 7 the ]]/(HD
1
of HD 2) ',rileO<)bfStl_alT]HD- Zand
HD 2jacks cnn be used with Pmgf_ssl_ (480p.
720p) and
/nteflnced(_80/: 10800scan system&A 708d s/qnd will
pfovk/e the best p/cruleperformance
• ffyourDVDp/ayerdoesnotl)avecomponentv/deo, see
page 1U ff J/otJrDVD pl_ye/has HDMI vkJeo,seepnde Z,9
To view antenna or Cable channels:
Turn OFF the VCR, Select the ANT 1 xideo input source on the TV.*
TOview the DVD player=
Turn ON d_e DVD player. Sdect d_e Co[orStream HD-!
video input source on the TV.*
To view the VCR:
Turn ON d_e VCR. Select d_e VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*
OF.,
•
Turn ON fl_eVCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*
Time the TV to channd 3 or 4 (whichever channd is vacant in your area).
D
To record a TV program while watching a DVD:
Turn ON d_e VCR, Tune the VCR to the charmel to record. Select d_e Co[orStream HD-! video input source on the TV* to view the DVD.
* lb select the video input source, press IN PUT on the remote control
(see page 67). lb program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,
Fromantennaor Cable g StereoVCR
DVD Nayer with component video
Note: 2)e VIDEO/AUDIOOUTjacks output the WnaL8tror:_the
ANT I, ANT2, VIDEO L VIDEO2, of VIDEO3]ncks whet1tbe appropriateinputmode is selected
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:
1. Connect d_e G-LINK cable according to dae instructions on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks on the TV (see illustration).
3. Se_the VCR to the appropriate line inpu_ (refbr to your
VCR owner's manual fbr details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See Chapter 7 fbr de_ailson using the TV Guide
On Screen system.
The
unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materiMs is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and crimina_ liability,
17
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)
17
Copyright _') 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFIAT[ON, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:52 PM
[
÷
Connecting two VCRs
You will need: two coaxiaJ cabJes two sets of standard A/V cables From
For better pk-ture peffo/rr_ance, iT VCR 1 has S video, use 8f7S v/_teocable (plus the audlb cablesj ibstead of the st.l_durd wdeo cable Howevel; do slot connect botb
_ypesof video cable to VIDEO 7 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time anter/na or Cable
or the plctur_ performance
wi2
be unacceptabb
, ff I/CR Z has inono audlb, connect L/MONO
oil the TI/(VIDEO 0
to the aud:o out jack ors VCR Z uslbg the white audio cable ofyl_z
" DO not
COfyfyeot frye sai77e VCR tO
the
output
TV at tbe same time and
Ibputj_cks
on tlye
To view the anterma or Cable signal:
Tttrn OFF VCR 1, Sdect the ANT-! video input source.*
To view VCR 1:
Tttrn ON VCR !. Sdect the VIDEO 1 video inpu_ source.*
To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:
Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line input (refbr to your VCR owner's manuaJ for detaiJs).
Sdect the VIDEO 1 _ideo input source.*
Note:
, Ifyou have a &lble box corlnect the Cable box and splitter iT) VCR1 as shown on page 14
•
TheVIDEOOUTslgnallbcorpoi_qesMJcrov/slon_copynglyt
protection
technolog_ wlylcl7may prevent you flora
t_cordlbg celt; ilb
@°iriiTv !@
L R
S
Tile VIDEO OUT j?_c'kdoes not output tbe POP plcture
O W_efl dle POP wlbdowis open the AUDIO OUTjacks output the
sound of the active window (mail? or POP) fZbradditional
/llformat/on, see "Notes about recording"
on page 73
Note: 77/e VIDEO/AUDIO
OUY)bcks output tbe s/clnals t/om tbeANT L ANT2,
VIDEO _ VIDEO 2, of VIDEO 3/acks when
the appropriate klput mode is selected
Z
* ]o select the video input sotirce press IN PUT on the remote control
(see page 67), ]o program the PV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3,
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:
Note:
If you connect you! devices according
to the
i/lu'_tlyltlon above,
youwillrecordtlom theTV&aide
**Thisprv}ductincorporatescopyright proteclion technology that is protected by
U.S,patents and other intellec*ualproperty rights. Useof this copyright protection technology must be authorizedby Macrovision and is intended for homeand other limited pay perMew usesonly,unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverseengineeringor disassemblyis prohibited. Macmvision is a _egiste_ed trademark of Macrovision Corporation,
The unauthorized
recording,
use, distribution, or revision of television programs,
videotapes,
DVDs, aad other reateria_s is prohibited under the
Copyright
Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.
1. Co*mec__heG-LINK cane according to the ir_str.c_ions
on page 25.
2. Make sure the VCR2 is com_ec_ed to the A/V OUT ja&s on the TV (see ilb*s_ration).
3. Se_the VCR to the appropria;e lh_e input (refbr to your
VCR owner's manual for de_aiJs),and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 fbr details on se_fing up the TV Guide
On Screen system.
5. See Chapter 7 fbr details on using the TV Guide
On Screen system.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)012
8
18 _ 8/31/04, 12:52 PM [
÷
A
÷
Connecting an HDMI" or a DVi device to the HDMI input
The HDMI I_]input on your IV receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or uncornpressed digkal video fforn a DVI [2]device.
This input is designed to accepEHDCP [31program material in digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B-compIiant I<consumer electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with
HDMI or DVI outpuD.
The HDMI input is designed tbr best perlbrmance with 720p and 1080i high-definition video signals, bu[ will also accep[ and display 480i and 480p signals.
[
NOTE: NEVEiR gONNEC'[ TH|S I'V
TO A PERSONAL C:@MPUTER
(PC).
THISTV IS NOTINTENDEDFORUSE WITHA PC,
[q HDM/
H'_/h Def/n/l/on Muli/medkl Interf_ce
[2] DV/
Diq/tal ViUeo /nten'nce
Is] NDCP
N/_'h bafTdw/dth D/_'/?;IIContesTtPfotect/orl
[4] E/A/CEA 86 WH67B compliance cove/s the tf_lf7smlsslof7of
docompfmssed d/_'/ta/ v/Ueo w/lh h/gh ba/ldw/dth d/?/ia/ cof)imf)t
protection, wlTM) /s brits[1 stgmdardl2ed for fmception of hl_'h definii/on
video signals Because tiffs/s an evoMng tedTno/oss
h'/s
possible that
some devices may riot ope/_te properly w/lh the Th'
NOTE: _ ensure that the HDM/ ot DV/ device /s reset
pmpefljz ills _mcommended that you b/low these
pmcecMes
"
Whel7 ium/Hg ol7 your electronic
C'OfYlpof7eRtS,
tHrH
0#t the Tg first,
and tl_eo tl_e HDMI o_ DVI device
• Whel_ turning offyour elect/ohio compoilen_5, turn off
the NDMt or Oil#
dev#ce first, and then tl_e TQ:
To connect an
HDMI device, you will need:
. one HDMI cable (type A cormector)
Fbr proper operation, it is recommendeci
ibat you use
as short an HDMI cable as possible
You should not
enc;ounf_r r/ifficulty ff you use an HDMI cable shorl_r
tf_ar716 4 fl (,Smj
HDM/
c'ab/e transfers both video and audie, Separate arTa/og audio cab/ms are not required (see illusirasfon
be/owj
Some CDVs (viUeo CDs] may not output Uigila/ auUie signals, In that case, you may hear sound by
c'onnecUrd analog audio c.ab/es I-Iowmver; ff you c:c_nnect arTa/og auUio cables with ibis c.onnec'Uon, ibe HDM/
t>rTninal on the TV win not rec'cive UveI-tDMI cJg)italaudio
signal and you viii/hear analog auUio only
,gee "Setlieg ibm HDMI auUie merle" on page 49
HDI_I device
To connect a DVI device, you will need:
. one HDMI-to-DVI adap[er cable
(HDMI type A connector)
_b_ pmper opelai/on, lhe lef_gtl_of an HDMI-io
DIll
ad_pimf cHb/e dToul(I riot exceed 98 tt C3mj Yhe
rmcomrrle/_ded lerlg177/s 6 6 tt _2m]
" one pair of standard analog audio cables
An HDMI to DIll adapte/ cable tlansfef_ vk/eo on{lz Separate analog audio cabbs a_e required (see/llusl's_tion belowj
See "Setik W ffTe HDM/ aur//o moUe" on page 4,9
OVldevice
TV
TV
÷
L
HD MI, the HDMI logo, and High Definition Multimedia Inte_lace are trademarksor registeredtrademarksof HDMI Licensing,LLC,
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 19
÷
8/31/04,12:52 PM
19
[
A
÷ [
Connecting a digital audio system
The TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack outputs a
p[_ or>channe_ PCM(p<se<ode
meduhtion) signal fbr use with an external Dolby Digital decoder or other external audio system with optical audio inpus.
You will need:
¢ one optical audio cable
To control the audio:
Tim1 on the TV and the digital audio device.
Press MENU on the TV's remote centre[ and open the AUDIO lnentL
Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.
hi the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT rid& select either
DOLBY DIGITAL or PCM, depending <7,1your device (see
"Sdecting the optical audio output tbrmat" <3,1pate 81).
TV
Turn off the TV's bulk-in speakers in the same AUDIO SETUP menu (above). Also see '{Turning off the buih-in speakers" o,1 pate 8!.
Note:
*
Someaudio
systemsmay
sTot
with
Dolby
D/_qitgJ
S/qfl3f8 Older eL]clio SySl_tTIS
fhc_[ 8re
Rot compat/ia/e with
SttJRdJtff_] optics/out s/qf78f8<178y
frlay d;image speake/s of heao_phof?esTHIS DAMAGE
IS NOT
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY
* 21e DIGITAL AUDIO OUI)iack may not output some d/d/t_l audio
surecos
because of c'opy
f_St/fet/of_&
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs,
videotapes,
DVDs, and ether materials is prohibited
under
the
Copyright
Lows of the UnRed States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability,
Connecting an analogaudiosystem
This connection albws you to use external speakers with an externa[ attdio amp[ifier to adjust the sound [e_e[.
You will need: one pair of standard audio cables
To control the audio:
Turn o,1 the TV and the stereo amplifier.
_,_,_>_,1 "Wrn_,lg
speakers" <>,1page 81).
Note:
7b hea_ sound w/?el_us/bg an external au&b amp//?te_
the volume of both the TV and the
8fglp/ff/ef
must
be set _) a
reasonabb //}ten/?ig bveZ
TV
Anam0gaudio stuNNer
÷
HM94(E)012
0
20
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORATION.
AH rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [
A
÷ L
You can use the TV's IR OUT jack (infrared pass<hrough) to rernotdy operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-controlIed devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote<entre[red VCR or DVD phyer) enclosed within an entertainment center or simihr cabineE. Without d_e
IR OUT connecuon, the device typically would need to be visible to operate it remotel>
You will need: one dual-wand IR bhster cable (included with your TV) od_er audioAideo cables as required to connect d_e de, ice(s) to the TV (see pages 13-2(t)
To connect the IR blaster cable:
1.
Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device.
This sensor is marked on some de_ices.*
2.
Align one of the IR blaster cable's wands abouE 1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of"the device and attach it using double-sided mounung tape. If you have a second device, attach the second wand in a simihr manner.
(See il&stszldov at ri@t.)
Note: If you
& nothavea seconddevk:e,
thesecondv>_nd
Infrared
IR blaster cable wand
Back of TV aDmox ncn from qevlce
,
Plug d_e IR bhster cabb's plug into one of the TV's
TheaterNeE OUT jacks.
To control the device(s):
Point the TV remote controI
(programmed to operate the device; see Chapter 3) or the device's remote controI at the f'ront of"the TV and press d_e button tbr the desired t:m_cfiomThe signal passes from the remote control through the TV to the device via the IR bhaer cable.
Note:
*
Ifvouusethedevice_r_mote
c'ont/dto
ope/_ffe the device,
you
alsowillneedtousetheTV?remotecontrolto
operate theT_/
.
For add/tioR8/oorT_/el opt/on&
see "Theater\let
c'ont/d" at rl_'h£
on screen
device
H you camtot locate
the device
s infrared
sensor:
1 _J/y_OFF JTedevfce
2 St_lrtirlg at the Iowe/left coeTer of the device, plaice the end of the device _ f_h_lote control
_¢vit/I
the/nflYff_d e/Tlitte/3 so it touches tile
front of the device and p/ess POWE/Z (Do not use the T1/_ r_lT}Ol_e
control for this step _
3 ffthe device turns on. the p/uce the temote oorFld touched the devk;'e is the location of the sensor
4 /fthe devk'edoesnotturnon,movethetemo_
corK/elsl/_htly
I2)the
//_lht
5
Repeatstep 4 unt//i/ou locatetl}edev/ce_/fffl_r_dsensor:
TheaterNet
TM
o -scree device co tro
For additional controI options tor y)ur home theater system, set up the TheaterNe_ on-screen device controI tbature. You can use this fbature to contro_ many
IR remote<entre[red devices and IEEE- 1394 devices using the on-screen control icons.
See pages 44 48 for deta/Tson
setting up and using 7heaterA/e_
See pacms22_4
for details on
connecting/EEF
_394 devices
Note: 77_eTheater?Jet loon controls a/e the only device [Lir}ct/ons awffl@le when the icons ar_ on screen 7_)aocess other device function& close the Fhea_r#'et icon w/ndo_/
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
21
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct} 21
÷
8/31/04,12:53 PM
[
÷
A
÷ L
You can ttse the two bi-direcdonaI IEEEq394 ports on the back of your TV to cormect digita[ video devices that meet CEA specifications tbr IEEEq394.
Because these ports are bi-direcdona[, they can be used for both p[ayback and recording.
Because
IEF E
1884 /s an evolving technolog_z it/s pogsfble that some
of all of tke c.onnectMty features of a device you connect to _7}e7-1/
tlffougb the/EEE
1394 ports may not operate X)u
d?ou/d
conf/rrn
that the dev/ces you desffe to use with the IEEE 1394 pOllS will
operate with those ports
• Fh/} TV does not support 8/I pos:4b/e IEEE 13'94 signal lypes For
bfofmatk_n on s/}'naZ8supported by the/EEE
1394 ports, see
• IEEE 1394 cable c_vTiesboth 8udk) and v/deo infom_atk)n;
no sepaf_ll_
8udk) cnb/es 8f_ f_qu//_d
br
8 complel_
connection
You will need:
_' one (or two) [EEE-1394 cables
TV must be $4 O0 (_ O0 Mbps fn_xi/nlorO
_' additional A/V cables if'your device is analog-compatibb
(see "Using anaiog-compadbb IEEE-! 394 devices" bdow).
/"
Nff_E,- NE_ER
CONNECT TN|$
T@
A P_RSONAL
COMPUTER (PC}.
,' _ ", THISTVISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWKHAPC,
Supported sig Ns
The IEEE-1394 ports support the sig*mlslisted bdow only.
Akhough incompadbb vide<), audio, and digita[ contro[ signa[s taproot be decoded by the TV, these signa[s may be passed through the [EEE-1394 cabb to other compadbb devices.
Incompadbb devices may not appear in the TheaterNer" menu.
, MPEG-2 digital
video
signals
Other dkj/t./ vk/eo sign;_/8 such as DV _'/?/eo ;;,re
klcompatible and must be decoded by the soume device and
sent to the TV as anabg video (composite of S video)
, Dolby Digital a_d P]IPEG digital audio signals
Od_er d/g/m/ aud/b signals (such as DPM MP3. and D75")
8f_ /bcompat/b/e and cannot be decoded by the T1/
*
EIA-775
and AV/C digital control
Your TV can serve as the control center l%r many devices that are compatibb with EIA-775 or AV/C [EEE-!394
control standards (described bdow).
The TV csrlnot contfo/
/E_E
1394 devices thRt use _vny otbe/
conife/ si?gnd_fds
-
EL&-775 digital control aik)ws tinring devices (such as
Cabb boxes) to send simpb graphics; however, this standard does not allow the TV to control the Cabb box through IEEE- 1394.
- AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (alch as power, pia> stop rewind, t_st-forward, pause, and record), as appiicabb to the specific device.
Using TheaterNef '°on-scree device
Using a Nog-compatiNe devices
EEE-1394
Some digital IEEEq394 devices are compadbb with analog signals. For exampb, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play
VIIS or S-VHS fbrmat videos. Such devices allow you to play apia[og tapes that you rented or recorded, or record anah)g programs from antemm or Cabb TV systems. To use the
IEEEd394 device's analog features, you need to com_ect the device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus audio cables) in additiop_ to copmecdng d_e IEEEq394 cable.
Note:
If you have an/FEE 1394 deviee connected to botll di_tW and an_:log ir_puts on tile TV, the TI/automatk-_ffly
switches between analog and dig/tsq modes, as needed, wben
the bitiW deviee access is initig_tedusifw the TheatefNet bu_ton
See page 44
[of
detg_i/son using the 2?eaten\let _eatufe
>)u can use the TheaterNe_ tbamre to control some IEEE-1394 devices using <m-screen controI icons. See page 44 fbr derails on setting up and using the TheaterNet fbamre,
IEEE 1384,you can t/y i_/ng /R p;_ssthrough with the ;q/%
f_rrlote contld (p;_ge21) of use the dev/ce_ f_rrlote contlo/
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)012
2
22 _ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
Connecting an AVHD (e×temal
hard
drive) or D=VHS digital
recorder
>)u can cormect an IEEE-1394 cornpatible D-VHS or AVHD
(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba's
S:,_mbior'' 160HD4 AVHD) to record high defirfition and standard definition material f)'orn either tuner and control live
TV (pause, rewind, etc.).
When you connect a D-V-HS or AV-HD device to the TV:
* The remote contro[ keys (LIVE, REW, PAUSE, PLAY,FF, eEc.)are auEomatically actNated to allow control of live TV.
* TheTV Guide On Screen system is automafica[[y configured to a[[ow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 fbr deEai[s.Also see page 49 fbr deEai[son seEdng the AVHD device skip time.
* Some programs may riot be recorded due to copy protection restrictions.
iiiiii_}i[iSj
I
This TVis compatible with the new Toshiba
TM iiiiii
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorded
IEEE-1394 device initialization
When )ou co*meet a new IEEE-1394 device to the TV and turn it on, the device immediatdy announces its presence to the TV
(and other networked IEEE-1394 de, ices, if any), and d_e f}allowingdevice initialization screen atttomatically appears.
Note:
With some devices, it may _v_ketap to one mk_ute
/or this screen to appear
1. If you have cormected your IEEE-1394 device to an analog input also, use the
&V< _
buttons to sdect the input in the ANALOG INPUT USED field; o_herwise, leave it set to '_None." (See 'q_Jsinganalog-compatible IEEE-!394
devices" on page 22.)
2. If you want to label the device, highlight EDIT LABEL and press ENTER.
overdkjilsqvideofecofdin,qandp/aybae_,Thinkofit asa
i "tapelessVCR"fordi,qlta/le/evision,Youcanpause,rewind,or i and
I apeto rewind,you canwowa programthatsiafl_drecording progr im ,bto
r,,:
funct/bnaliTyyou must f/f:_tset t4r>the TV Ou/de On Screen system (_ee
Chapte_5)
3. Press the
&_< _
buttons to sdect a character _br the first space and then press ENTER.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.
5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER to save the irffbrmation.
Note:
* The T1/m_ynotrecognizellon
A/Vorllon compatff_/e
IEEE _394 devices, however these devk;'esmay sti// be avni/able to other compatible/EEE _394 devices on the networf< o You
may
be able to use the
7-1/_
f_/TlOl_ CORt/O/tooperate some
coirlpatit)/e IEE_ _384 devices _)u must first program the rwrsote control to recoc_n/ze the device (see Chapter 3)
/_ J/OU ileed to use the remote control that came/vlth
the devk;'e
o 7bsbiba Is Isot Mb/e for the oper_ltion of any/EEE _394 device
otbe_ thall the _:vhba 3?mbio AVh'D r_corder:
÷
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct) 23
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:53 PM
23
[
A
÷ [
IEEE=1394 device management
The IEEE-!394 device infbrmation is saved in the TV's mernor> You can edit this device infbrrnation (fbr example, to edit the device name, change the analog input infbrmadon, or dde[e the device information f'rom the TV's memory if you no longer use that device).
To edit the IEEE-1394 device information:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.
2. HighIigh_ INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new see of INSTALLATION mepm icons will appear on-screen, as shown in s_ep 3 brow).
,
Open the DEVICES menu, highlight IEEE-!394
DEVICES, and press ENTER.
Important
information
regarding
UEEE-1394 device
interconnection
Note:
, Do not loop tbe last device in the chab_ back
to the T_.
If lhe cieviee chain is/oopecL the TV may /lot
_1/o_;_
ethel deviees b the d}ain
° Place
devices"
with the slowest communication
speed at
the end of each chaD1./fs dev/ee with a slower cammu/_/cat/on
speed is placed ahead era f,'_stefdevice b the ehain, the s/qnd
from the slowe_ devic'e will/lffefgf_ with 17}e sternal
fleI7_ the f_ste_
cievice 7o dete/TT_ifiethe con_mul_icr;,tionspeed of an IEEE 1394 cievice, look _f an ",5'"number near the deviee t_/EEE 1394 eof_nectoL 2?e hkjhet the "S" ntJrrlbeL the fnstef #_edevice
/i yauf
cieviee is/iotmat?ed with a/1%'" numbeL look in the device 3 tJsef
manual or call the cJeviee/_laflt./f_/ctt./[_[_ ted_ni(-_#support number
° If your IEEE= 1394 device has a two=position power
switeb, place the device at the end of the chain
or leave
the power switch
ON at all times,
ff the powe_ switch is OFF
it will interfere w_thsignals from devices be/7ind it in the el}ain
•
The maximum length
for an tEEE= 1394 cable between
each device is 15 feet.
° This TV/1_an/EEF _394A device 77_e/_EE _394B protocol is
__stef and intended to allow to_ /onge/ d/st_nc'es between dJev/ees andmult/ mom s_/stems /EEE _394A to IEEE _394B eonverteta
(_w_i/_bleat softie e/eotfoflics
SL/pplie/_)
may allow compatibility of
IEEE _394B devices with you/existing IEEE _394.A devices
•
The i"l_fflsnll:5siof7 _394 c_',bleused k_//tht/7/s 7-1/
must be .94O0 (4 O0 M/g_s max/munl)
4, Highlight the device you wan[ [o edit and press ENTER,
÷
5, Folh)w the on-screen prompts to modia_ the device in_brmation,
HM94(E}012
4
24
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 12:53 PM [
A
÷ L
This" cormeetien
is necessary for tire TI! Guide Go Screen TMsystem
to work with your cable box to receive
program listings arm to
enable
TI c Guide
On Screeo reeordi#g features
with your IiCR.
Note: This connection
is- not necessary
for AIiNO or D-IiNS recording
devices.
See pages
23 aim 49 for further details.
After you cormecc your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables included with your TV) fi'om your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK jack on the TV.
Note:
TV &;ida On &;r_en /;;fogle_rl ciHt_}is #w;ff/;slJletivedcff7 tile ANT Z _snd AN7-2 kvTtervT_r
tlvrxLqh the VIDEO 7inputs ff you /lave a cable box cwlrTected to VIDEO 7 FV Guide On Sc'/_en proglem
d_ff_is/lot 8vai/i_/_lethTough Bey off?el/fl/?)uts or7 U)/s T_ _se _he corTRectior7bfom_at/o/1 on p_ges 73 2:5
The G-LINK com_ecfion is necessary to enable the following f_amres of your TV Guide On Screen_' system:
If you have a (;able box, you need to connect: the G-LINK cable t}'om the Cable box to the G-LINK jack to receive the TV Guide
On Screen system's program listings tbr your Cable service.
If you have a VCR, you need to cotmecc the G-LINK cable from the VCR to the
G-LINK ja& to use the TV Guide On
Screen system's recording f_atures.
Frenl el Cable box
Te connect to the G-LINK iack:
1. Locate the inl}'ared sensor on the front of your VCR or
Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices2
Aligu one of the G-LINK (IR blaster) cabIe's wands about
1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the
VCR and acEachit using double-sided mounting tape.
If you have a Cable box, acEachthe other wand in a similar marmer. (D'ee
i/,2_e'ts_ilioss
)
Note:
If you do not have a C2ff)lebox, coil tl_e second wried
/vl?ll a r_Jt)t_erbarTd afTdleave it behbd i<heTV
3. Plug the G-LINK (IR bk_ster)cable's plug into the TV's
G-LINK jack.
For details on setting up the TV Gtfide On Screen system:
See Chapter 5.
For details on using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide;
See Chapter 7.
*If you camret
locate
the device's
infrared selrsor:
2 Smrtlbg at the ©wer left comer of the device, pbce the end of tile
dewce_ r_mote control (wth the/Tffrared enTittel2 so it totJches the
tent of dTedevice and press ,oOWER (Do i_ot use the TV_ t_mote
c'ont/d tor tlliS step) cJevk'e
is
the Ioc8_<ior7
4 ffthe cievice does/lot turn on, move the r_mote cerT,/el s@htly to the
fi_Jh t
8fTdpres\_PO VV_R a_aio
5 Repeatstep 4 unti/vou/ocate
the o'evice_infsar_dseesoi:
÷
25
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)
25
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:53 PM
yemete co#tyef
Learning about the remotecontrol
The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a complete list of the remo[e controUs f_mc[ions, see the female control f_mctiona_key char[ on pages 28-29.
POWERturns the TV on and off Press POWER to turn orl the TV. The red LED indicator on the
TV front touchpad win be illuminated. Press POWER again to turn off the TV,
Note:
The QI//ck Restart settl)?g will affect the amount of time it takes fo_ the picture to appear
whe/} you tt/m el?
tile T_ See page
50/of deMIs
UGHTThe f'lrst press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on the Illuminatior_ mode. With the I11umirmtior_mode on, pressing any other key lights the keypad for 5 seconds
(1(t seconds if you're in programming mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle beFween turrfing the Illumination mode on and off,
Chaired
Numbers
(0-9, -/lO0)
direr@ tune charmeIs,The "-" button is used to tune digital ch rends (page 68),
INPUTselects the video input source (page 67),
MODEcycles through the six device modes: TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and
AUDIO2, The mode indicator light will remain lit _br a few seconds (page 27).
pie SiZEcycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3, and FuII (page 70),
TheaterNetDEWeEdisplays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 44),
TheaterNetCTRLaccesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 44),
MENU
accesses the menu system (p_ges 34 and 35).
TVGUIBE
opens the TV Guide On Screen system (Chapter 7),
INEOprovides detailed ir_brmation on highlighted items in the TV Guide On Screen system
(Chapter 7),
DVD _}N
SLOW/DIR
DVD OLEAR
SKIP/SEARCH
Arrow buttons (AT4 _) sdect or adjust programming me)ms.
ONa,V
udes through programmed ch umels when no me)m is or>screen (41); funcdorm as p_ge up/down when a menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide
On
gcreen system is open
(Chapter 7).
VOLA_'
adjusts the volume levd,
EXIT
doses or>screen menus and the TV Guide
Or1
Screen system.
CNRTNreturns to the last viewed charred (p_ge 68), or stops the picture viewer slide show (pge 83),
Livereturns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while cor_tirming to record to the 'lbshiba Symbio _''AVHD recorder (pages 23 and 49),
NOTEreduces or turns offthe sound (page 79).
Note:
The eFFOFsqessa_e "/Vot
Available" will appear ff you press a key for a function that is not ava#able,
Remotecontrol effectiverange
[>()/?ltremote cent/el towmd remote set?sot
on t/ol?t
of
7-1/ q fl
J
SKIP/SEARCH_ and I_ jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide
©n Screen listings (Chapter 7),
USTdisplays the 'lbshiba Symbio
TM
AVHD recorder play list (if avail_Ne) (page 23),
FAY
CH A_'
tunes to the next higher/k)wer favorite charmel (page 43),
VCR+accesses the TV Guide On Screen manual recording functior_.
SPLITturns the POP fe _ture on and off (p_ge 73).
pie NODEselects the picture mode (pge 76).
FAYSCANaccesses the _worite cham_d search ftmction (page 75).
FREEZEfreezes the main picture in the double-window (p_ge 74).
16.4 ft (5m)
Copyright © 2084 TOSHIBA COFIPORAT ION. All rights reserved,
HM94(E)026
6
26 _ 8/31/04, 1:07 PM [
÷
A
÷ L
installin9 the remote control batteries
To install the remote control batteries:
CAUHON: A/ways &spose of ha/toNesin a des/iqna_edd/sposa//ec;,at/_n.
Never tf_rowbattenes inte a fire,
1. S_ide the batEery co_er of'f'the back of"the remote control
F_
J
2, h_staHtwo "AA" size a[ka[irle batteries. Match the + and - symbols on the batteries
to
the s) mbo_s on the batEery compartment.
Note:
. Batleries shou/d a/ways be disposed ofw/Ih the
environment in min¢:_A/ways dispose of balleHes m
a(;cor_/anre with applk;ab/e /aws and r_giJ/al/ens
. Never mix batlery types or tJse new and used
batterfes in cembffTatien.
. When necessary le re/-_/ar,,ebatledes if7 ff_e mmole
(:ent,,ol, a/ways replace both balteries will7 new one&
. Air,lays remove batterfes from mmo/e
coniTo/ffthey
am dead or if the emote
centre/is not te be used
for an evtended perfod of time. This win prevent
batte/y acid from/eaki/w inte ff_e battery
coeTpaFlTnenL
3, Slide the battery co_er on to the remote control until the lock sm_ps,
Using the remotecontrol MODE buttonto control your other devices
Your TY remote control has one dedicated TY mode and five programmable muki-brar_d modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2.
The deEmk device modes and programmable device modes are listed bdow,
Note:
77_eF1!re/note control/s prepregrammeo' to ope/ate most _sh/ha devices
If !ou own a non 7#_shibadevice or a 7_shba d_vice that the remote centre/is not pf_plog/aFn/7_ed to opef_?te,you will need to prog/_m the rw77ote controL See
"PlOglTlfTIn_iL_l
r_rnote contld tO
opel_ffe )lOUl
other
dell/ces"
on page 30
1) TV Toshiba TV
2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver
3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR
4) DVD Toshiba DVD
5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver
6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD
1) TV
2) CBL/SAT
3) VCR/PVR
4) DVD
5) AUDIO 1
6) AUDIO 2
Toshiba TV
Mttlti-brand video/audio devices
YoU can direcdy sdect the de_ice mode by pressing the corresponding number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE buteon.
,j-C)
Note:
Altllo_\?17your new TV_ remote centre/incItJcJes
codes tot mary clev/ces, it fTTaynot include
code:_ for some or all of tl_e features on celta/n devices you wish to centrex ff you are unabb to
preg/afl7 rise TV_ re/77otecontso/ i_)operate
you/device or some of dTefeatures on tlsat
device use rite dev/ce_ r_mote centre/or the
corff/ oL_oil the dev/c'e
Copyright O 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
27
8/31/04,1:08 PM
HM94(E)O26-33(3-RC) 27
[
÷
A
÷
Remote ControUfunctional key chart
CALL
Selects the image shape.
Men u/
Guide Men u
......
TV Guide ......
Guide Inff_ ......
Theater Net
......
Device
Theater Net ......
Control
Enter ......
Men u select ......
up
Menu select ......
down
Menu se]iect ......
left/right
Exit ......
Remote control device mode selection
Lights the remote ke> and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode. *1
Sleep timer
Po_ve_ _
Power
Po_ve[ _ PovJeE
Power
Power Power
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 6
Digit
7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
(digi ta]_ separator)
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
E)igit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
¢_ub
cham_el)
Digit l
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit- 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
I00
Digit- 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit- 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
+I0
AVinput
AVinput 2 Digit 2
AVinput 3 Digit 3
AVinput 4 Digit4
CD
Tm_er
Phono
Cassette
Aux
---
1 Digit 1
Digit 5
E)igi t
6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0, I0
< TV VCR input
TV
--TV
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
< TV
TV
TV
TV TV .:
Action,
Menu
Guide
INFO
TV <
Enter, Select
Menu select up
Menu select down
Menu select left/right
Exit
TV <
Men u
TV <
DVD setup
TITLE
Top menu
Sul)dtie
Audio
Enter
Men u select up
Menu select down
Men u se]iect left/right
DVD clever l\_eH 11
Guide
INFO
ADVANCE
---
Enter
Men u select up
Menu seDct down
Menu se]iect left/right
---
Channel Channel up/down,
Pageup/d0wn
Voh*me up/down
Voh*me up/down .2
up/down .2
Previous channel
Previous channel
Live .........
O,]-_-ee,_ --display
Channel up/down
Vol ume up/down .2
Previous channel
Channel up/down
--Channel up/dowl]
--Channel up/down
VoIume VoIume up/down .2
up/down .2
--DVD return
Voiume Voiume up/down .2
up/down .2
Voh*me up/down .2
---
O>_c,'een
display
O>_c,'ee,_
display
Live TV
---
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
HM94(E)026
8
28 _ 8/31/04,1:08 PM
[
[
÷
Remote Controlfunctional key chart(co.t ..ed}
SCM'_2
Sound mute .2 Sound mute .2
Sound mme _-) Sound rante _-)
Sound mute.2 Sound
Inu[e .2
Sonlld mute.2
Sound
--Slow FWD
SlowFWD
SlowREW mike
g2
SlowFWD
Skip F_[)
Skip REW
Rewind
Pattse
Play
Fast FWD
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
TV/SAT
Rewind
Pause
Play
Fast FWD
TV/VCR
SkipFWD
SkipREW
Rewi_3d
Pause
Play
Fast FWD
---
---
---
---
---
---
Skip FWD
Skip REW
Rewi;]d
Pause
Play
Fast FWD
Rewind
Pause
Play
Fast FWD
Reverse
Disc shif't
AM/FM Disc shif}
Replay
Stop
REC ]_,ieml
(SingleClick)
LIST
FAV cMnnel up/d own
VCR+
---
---
Stop
Record
(DouUe Click)
Stop --Stop Stop
Record
(DouUe (',lick)
Split
PIC M()DE
FAV SCAN
Freeze
< TV
TV
TV
<
TV _
TV
TV _
TV
TV
TV
,_
TV
TV
TV
-
TV
<
TV _
TV _
TV
TV
TV
<
•
TV
TV
TV
NOteS;
....
will send nothi/ig
•
" TV" will jump to Tt/
"
.* VCR"wil/fiJmp_b/ustact/ve
a key is pressed b that mode)
VCRorDVD
_Back/_jht key is toK_e
Does/._ot send IR signal
('Lastactive
I/CR/DI/D'isthemodethatf_maklsk_faminiml£T_of5seconds,
_2 K)lume will punch thmtLd/? to 71/by ciefaul_ I/Vhefl the volume/2s unlocked, all 17}edevk;'es will have their own volume ff ttleif ID has
volume dnt_l F/TeAUD modes (/eceiveL CDj will have thei/ own vo/tJi77eJ voltJFtle/oo'/</Sdone to T_/[CBL/SA7,- V£'R/PVR, or DVD
mode See
"rising
I'he VO/tJFne
orff
÷
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC) 29
Copyright _? 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
_ 8131104,1:08 PM
29
F
A
÷ [
Programmingthe remote control to operate yourother devices
Device code setup
1_ Refer to the muIti-brand remote contro_ device code table on pages 32-33 to find the code for the brand of'yottr device.
If'more than one code is listed, try each one separatdy until
3xm find the one that works.
2. Press MODE mlfiI the Mode indicator fbr the device
(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights up.
3. While holding down the RECALL bumm, press the
Channel Number buttons to enter d_e fbur-digit code fbr your brand of'device. If' a valid code is entered, the mode indicator will blink twice. If' an invalid code is entered, she mode indicator will blink one long blink.
4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to test the code.
You have entered the correct code.
ff'&e device doey J_otre_j.,ovdh &e re,,_olecomrol:
You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3 and 4 using another code.
Note: ir_addition to POVdER, coslfhz71that aNnecessa/y keys
of 7the TV f_fTsote crJp_/olopel_ffe you[ cievice ff some keys
are not opei_@)na/, repeat the device code setup LisiiW
8fsothe/ code (if otlse/ codes 8re//{_ted
for you/
devicej
St,afte/ tfyieg all i/sted codes, the necessa/y keys rio slot oper_m your dev/ce, use rise device_ of_4ii?aitemote cont/o/
5. Press MODE to select the TV mode to control the TV.
Note:
• /although the TV _emote c'of7tlol inciudes codes for masly device& it may
not/rsclude codes for some or all of the features on certain ciev/ces you
wish to controL
if you
are unable
to progr_sm the TV femote cofstf_)/to
operate you/cievice o_ some of the features on that o'ev/ce, use the
device's fwnote control or the cosltmh osl the device
• _)schtimeyoudsailgetheba_eriesyouw///needtoreprog/_mthe remote cosfffoZ
• Some fsewe/VORs
[espof)ci
to
e/the/of two codes These VCR_ have a
sw/lch bbe/ed "VCRWVCR2" /@our VCR has this kind of switch and
does not _espond to tile codes for VotJ/ VCP,brand, set the switch to _?se
other posiUon ("I/'CR 7"or "VC?R2') and teptogm£rl tile tWTsoteco/st[oL
Searching and sampling the code of a device (8500)
If'you do
riot
know the device code f'or a particular device, you can cycIe the remote controI through the avaiIabIe codes for that device mode and sample the f'mlctions to find the code that operates the target device. The keys avaihbIe to be sampled, provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,
VOL &, CH &, and PLAY.Invalid keys will be ignored while in program mode.
To cycle through each available device code and sample its
_nctions:
1.
Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.
2.
WhiIe biding down RECALL, press 8 - 5 - 0 - 0.
The remote control
will
enter program mode.
Point the remote control at the target device and press
POWER (or other f'ttnction buttons that are available to be sampled).
/TiDe device respowts> &e re,,_otec0mr0L'
Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit the program mode.
ff'&e does
s_otres?ond > &e rev_olecovtrol:
Press A, arid then press POWER.
Repeat this step until the device responds co the remote control, and then press RECALL.
Note: When a seamh cycle h comp/eter/, the mode indioalor vdii b/ink throe times. The remote oontto/ wi// begin Io r:yc/e Usmugh the avai/ab/e codes again, if no key
is pressed wilhir? 10 seconr/s whi/e programming,
lfse
remote cotstsT/ win exit he program mode and return to file
pmvsbus corse.
-POWER
-Numbers
MODE
EA
--VOL
A/_ i RECALL
÷
HM94(E)026
0
30
Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
.
8/31/04, 1:08 PM [
A
÷ L
Using the volume lock feature (8000}
For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the voIume controls (VOL &/Y and MUTE) can be locked to the sdec_ed device mode. This fba_ttredoes no_ apply to the AUDIO 1 and
AUDIO 2 modes.
To lock the volume controls to always control the
CABLE/SAT device w*lum.e (for example):
1. Repeatedly press MODE to sdect CABLE/SAT mode.
2. While holding down the RECALL burton, press 8 - 0 - 0 - 0.
3. Press VOL &.
The CABLE/SAT mode ligh_ will blink two times docked).
To reset the w*lume controls to the original device mode:
1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 - 0 - 0 - 0.
2. Press VOL V.
The mode light will blink four times (*mlocked).
Operational feature reset (8900}
This tbature dears aII seEup tbatures not rek*ted to "Device code set tip" arid resets the Valttme Lock to "TV/'
To reseEthe features:
WhiIe hoIding down the RECALL button, press 8 -9-0 - (t.
The Mode indicator will blink two times, and d_en pattse and blink two more times.
-POWER
-Numbers
MODE
_VOLA/T i RECALL
÷
HM94(E)026-SS(3-RC)
Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, A[] rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 1:08 PM
31
F
A
÷
Multi-brand remotecontrN device codes
VCRs/PVRs
B_ed
ADMIRAL
A[WA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMIC
BELL&H( )WELL
BROKSONtC
CANON
CCE
C'ITIZEN
(RAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWO()
DBX
D[MENSIA
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GE
(3(3 VIDE()
GOLDSTAR
GRAD[ENTE
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JENSEN
[vc
KENWO(bD
LG
LXI
MAGN A\a )X
MARANTZ
MARTA
MEMOREX
MGA
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
MU LTITECH
NEC
OLY M
P[(2
OPT[MUS
ORION
PAN ASONIC
PENNEY
PENTAX
Code
(t137, 0151, (t163,
(t149, 0150, 0182
01 (16
(tl70, 0171,0168,
(t134, 0156
(t123, 0145, 0100,
(t127, 00168
(t124, 0123
(t139
(t139, 0110, 0111,
(t134, 0157, 0158,
(t184, 0185, 7104
(t139, 0110, (t106,
0111, 7104
(t159
(t127, 0106, 0100,
(t1(t7, 0108, 0105, o 1 o 9
(t131, 0123, 0124,
(t173
0139, 0110, 0111
(t106
(t124, 01(t9
(t138, 0140, 0147,
(t148, 0141, (t142
0100, 0145
(t135
(t127, 0132, 0181
(t129, 0114, 0115,
0116
(t139, 0111
0105, 0113
(t120, 0126, 0180
(t123, 0125
(t143
(t106
(t1(t5, 0129, (t106
(t145, 0124, 0127
(t143, 0101,0124,
(t175
(t139, 0110, 0111
(t145
(t143, 0126, 0119,
(t1(t3, 0125, 0142,
(t120, 0118
(t105, 01(t8, 0109,
(t1(t7, 0113, (t165
(t127, 0126, (t120,
(t134
(t133, 0145, (t124
(t138, 0140, (t147,
(t148, 0141, (t142,
(t161, 0164
(t147, 0127, 0104
0139, 0110, 0111,
0134
(t124, 0123
(t128, 0121, 0135,
01 (16
(t126, 0120, 0132
(t123, 0124, 0121,
(t122, 71(t0
(t124, 0100, (t145,
(t105, 0139, (1110,
(1111
VCRs/PVRs {cont.}
BPand Code
PH[LCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROS(AN
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK
RCA
0100, 0111, 0145
(t131, 0124, 0127,
(t123, 0126, 0120,
0143
(t131, (tl23, 0124,
0173
0123
(t145, 0100, (t123,
(t124, 0131, (t146,
(t1(tl, 0102, (t133, o 174
(t121, 0122, 0123,
0124
(t133, 0124, 0105,
(t136, 0109, 0140,
(t127
(t133, 0145, 0100,
(t123, 0124, 0131,
(t146, 0101,0102,
(t170, 0172, 0174,
(1176, 0183
Replay TV
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SAMTR(tN
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHINTO
SYMPHONIC
TASH] R()
TATUNG
TEAC
M
SIGNATURE 2000
SINGER
SONY
SV2000
SYLVANIA
TECHNICS
71 (12
0124, 0105, 0136,
(t1(t9, 0140, (t127
(t137, 0102, (t104,
(t133
0163
(tl39, 0126, 0120,
(t152
0105, 0109, 0113
0101, 0102, 0104,
(t109, 0138, 0140,
(t147, 0148, 0126,
(t120
(t105, 0106, 0107,
(t1(t8, 0100
(t135, 0136, (t167,
(t162
0117
(t127, 0135
0117
(t128, 0129, 0130,
0153, 0154, 0155,
71(tl
0127
(t131, 0123, 0124,
(t127, 0178
0127, 0168, 0177
01 (16
(t139, 0110, (1111
(t139, 0110, (t127,
0111
(t121, 0122, 0123,
(t124
TEKNICA
THOMSON
Tivo
TOSHIBA
(t124, 0127, (1112
(1179, 0183
71(t0, 7101
0101, 0146, 0166,
(t160
VECTOR
RESEARCH 0111
WARDS
YAMAHA
(t135, 0136, 0109,
(t144, 0106
(t105, 0139, (1110,
(1111
ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169,
0180
Cable boxes
Brand
ABC
ARCHER
CABLEVIEW
CITIZEN
CURTIS
DIAMOND
EAGLE
EASTERN
GCBRAND
GEMINI
G .I./JERR{ )LD
HAMLIN
HITACHI
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MOVIETIME
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PULSAR
PUSER
RCA
REALISTIC
REGAL
REGENCY
REMBRANT
SAMSUNG
&A.
SLMARK
SPRUCER
STARGATE
TELECAPTION
TELEVIEW
TEXSCAN
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
UNIKA
UNIVERSAL
VIDE( )WAY
VIEWSTAR
ZENITH
ZENITH/DRAKE
SATELLITE
Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,
Code
1121,
1123,
11(t9,
1122,1111,
1152
1151,
1128,
11(t6,
1131
1110,1114,
1153
1129,1130,
1107,1150,
1101,
11(t5,
1132
1116
1132
1115
1132
1112,
1118,1140,
1142,1145, 1141,
1149
1134
1137,
1138
1105
1132,1105,
1111,
11(t5,
1112,1113
1101
11(t5,
1132,
1148
1110
1105
1101,
1144
11(t5
1124
1132,
11(t5,
1122,
1125
1132
1105
1113
1112,
1124,
1129
1134
1132,1125
1132,
1122,
1119,
1126,
1121,
1123,
1105
1143
1124,1125,
1127,1120,
1122,1111,
1152
1140,
1145,
1141,1142,
1118,1112
I l (13, 1124
I l (13,
I 1(18
1104,1105,
1133
1119,
1126,
1124,1125,
1127,1120,
1135,
11(t4,
1132,
1122,
11(t6
1136,1147
1146
1125
1132
1129,
1117,
11oo
1130
1100
HM94(E)026
2
32 _ 8/31/04, 1:08 PM [
L
÷
MuRi-brand remote control device
codes
(continued)
Brand
ADMIRAL
AIWA
CARVER
DENON
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
SOUN DE-SIGH
Code
6126
6133, 6135
6129
6142, 6151
EMERSON
FISHER
GARRARD
HARMAN KARDON 6120, 6121,6123,
HITACHI
JENSEN
6119
6107
6134
JVC
KARDON
KENWOOD
6139
6105, 6106
6117
6140, 6141, 6145,
6148, 6151
6123
LX]
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCNTOSH
NAKAMICHI
6100, 6101,6111,
6145
6136
6129, 6 ] 32
6129
612 ]
6110
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PION EER
QUASAR
RCA
6114, 6115
6108, 6118,612(},
6122
6124, 6125, 6127,
6150
6129, 6130, 6149
6108
6125, 6127, 6124
6147, 6137, 6138,
6131, 6152
6110, 6146, 6113
6105
6110, 6146
6142, 6143
6120
6128
6144
TEAC
TECHNICS
VICTOR
YAMAHA
6112, 6116, 61 ] 8
6127, 6124, 6125
6140, 6141,6145
6102, 6103, 6104
Receivers
Brand
ADMIRAL
AIWA
DENON
FISHER
GARRARD
HARMAN KARDON
JENSEN jvc
KENWOOD
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCNTOSH
MITS UBISH!
NAKAMICHI
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
Code
4120
4125, 4126, 4146
4134, 4135, 4136,
4143
41(t4
4113
41 ] 5, 4123, 4145
4129
4132, 4133, 4140,
4144
4100, 41(}8, 4141,
4142, 4147
4127,4128
4124
4116
4148
41(}6,4117
4109,4114
4103, 4127, 4131,
4130
Receivers (cont.}
Brand
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
QUASAR
RCA
SANSUI
SHARP
SONY
SOUNDE-SIGH
TEAC
Code
4119,4118,4121
4 ] 23
4105, 4107, 4150
4119, 4118, 4121
4103, 4105, 4127,
4131,4130, 4149
4103, 411 I, 4139
4134, 4137
4122
4138
4112,4113,4111,
4110
4121,4118, 4119
4132, 4133
4101,41(}2
TECHNICS
VICTOR
YAMAHA
Laser disks
Brand
DEN()N
HITACHI
KENWOOD
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NEC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PR()SCAN
QUASAR
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SONY
TEAC
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
Code
51 ] 4
5100
5102,
510 ]
51 ] 4
51 ] 4,
5114
5104,
5115
5103
5118,5119
51(}5, 51(}6,
51 ] ]
5114
51 ] 4
5104,
5115
51 ] 4
51(}5, 5106,
51 ] 2
51 ] 4,
51 ] 3,
5107,
5110
51 ] 4
51 ] 4
5 ] 01
5117
5116
5108, 51(}9,
Copyright _? 2804 FOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
DVD players
Brand
AIWA
APEX
DENON
FERGUSON
HITACHI jvc
KENWOOD
KONKA
MITSUBISHI
NORDMENDE
ONKYO
ORITRON
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RAITE
RCA
SABA
SAMPO
SAMSUNG
SHARP
SILVANIA
SMC
SONY
TECHNICS
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WAVE
YAMAHA
ZENITH
VIA LTA
FUNM
Satellite receivers
Brand
DISH
NETWORK(Echostar)
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESS VU
G.E.
G.I.(GENERAL
INSTRUMENT)
GRADIENTE
HITACHI
HNS(Hughes)
MAGNAVOX
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PRIMESTAR
PROSCAN
RCA
SONY
STARCHOICE
TOSHIBA
UNIDEN
Code
2105,2115,2116,
2117
2105
2105,2115
2106
2108
2114
2103,2111,2112
2103
2101,2102
2104
2101,2102,2118
2108
2106,2109,211(},
2113
2106,2109,2110,
2113
2107
2103,2108
2100,2103,2119,
2120,2121,2122,
2123,2124,2125
2101,2102
Code
3123
3120
3100,3117
3101
3111
3109
3115,3129
3119
3105
3101
3121
3124
310O
3103, 3116
3102
3113
3101, 3106
3101
3114
3110
3108
3132,3118
3125
3104, 3126, 3127,
3128
310O
3101
3103
3122
3100, 3130
3107, 3112
3131
3132,3118
HM94(E)026-33(3-RO)
33
÷
8/31/04, 1:08 PM
33
÷
F
The illustrations below and on d_e nex_ page pro_idea qttick o_er_Jew of your TV's menu system.
Mainmenu layout
To open the main menus (ilktstrated bdow), press MENU on d_e remo_e control or TV fi'ont pand.
Applications
TV Guide On Screen
TM
_ Audi0 Player
_ Digital CC/Audio Selector
_ Picture Viewer
CableCARD -4 [ CableDARD
TM options window (available only when Cab/eCARD is inserte_O]
Video
r Picture Settings -4 [ Picture Settings window ]
_ Theater Settings -4 [ Theater Settings window ]
Advanced Picture Settings -4 [ Advanced Picture Settings window ]
Audio
E Audio Settings -4 [ Audio Settings window ]
Advanced Audio Settings -4 [ Advanced Audio Settings window ]
Audio Setup -4 [ Audio Setup window ]
_____>
Prefek'enKaes i avorite Channels -4 [ Favorite Channels window ]
Closed Caption Mode-4 Off/CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4/T1 /T2/T3/T4
Closed Caption Advanced -4 [ Advanced Closed Captions window ]
Input Labeling -4 [ Input Labeling window ]
Game Mode -4 Off/On
Menu Language -4 English / Frangais / Espa_ol
Locks
-_ Enable Rating Blocking -4 Off/On
-_ Edit Rating Limits -4 [ Edit Rating Limits window ]
=_Channels Block =_ [ Channels Block window]
-_ Input Lock =4 Off / Video / Video+
-_ Front Panel Lock -4 Off/On
-_ GameTimer
TM
-_ New PIN Code
-4 Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min
-.--)
Setup
-_ Installation -4 [ Installation sub-menu opens -4 See h_stallatien sub-metlu details on r_ext page _
-_ Sleep Tinier-4 [ Sleep Timer window ]
=_On/Off Timer =_ [ On/Off Timer window ]
-_ HDMI Audio Selection -4 HDMI 1 -4 Auto / Digital/Analog
-_ Slide Show Intewal -4 2 sec, / 5 sec. / 10 sec, / 15 sec, / 20 sec,
-_ AVHD Skip Time -4 I nfin. / 3 rain, / 5 rain. / 15 rain.
-_ Quick Restart -4 On / Off
]
HM94(E)034
4
34
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 1:11 PM [
÷
Setup / lnstaRation menu layout (co.tinued)
To open d_e INSTALLATION rnenu (illustrated bdow): press MENU on d_e remote contro_ or TV front panel open the SETUP menu, sdect INSTALLATION, and press ENTER.
MENU / Setup / Installation
_
TerrestriaJ
Input Configuration -4 [ Input Configuration window ]
ANT1 1
Channel Program t ANT2 ] _ [ Scan for new channels on selected antenna ]
Channel Add/Delete -_ [ Terrestrial Channel Add/Delete window ]
Signal Meter -4 [ Signal Meter window ]
_evices
E EEE-139/4Devices "_ [ IEEE-1394 Device Management window ]
TheaterNet Devices -4 [ TheaterNet Device Setup window ]
TV Guide
On Screen Setup -4 Start =4 [ Start TV Guide On Screen setup ]
Time and Date -4 Strut Setup -4 [ Time and Date Setup window ]
System Status -4 System Information -4 [ System Information window ]
Navigating the menu system
You can use the buttoi_s on the remote control or TV front touchpad to access and na_ igate your TV's on-screen menu system.
" Press MENU to open the menu
SySteiIL
TV front touchpad
POWER
Use the up/down/bfdright arrow buttons (AV@ _) on the remote
EXIT _ _ _' A MENU
(ENTER*) centre1 or TV front pand to mo_e in the corresponding direcuon in a menu.
, Press ENTER to save your memt settings or sebct a highlighted item.
(A highlighted menu item appears in a dif'fbrent color in the rnerm.)
* The MENU button o/_
the TV front touchpad _mct_bns
as the ENTFR button when a meRtJ /s oR sct_efl
All menus close automatically if you do not make a sdection within 60 seconds, except the signal meter menu, which closes automatically af}er 5 minutes,
To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.
Remotecontrol
-MENU
ENTER
&
--
EXIT
35
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04,1:11 PM HM94(E)O34-35(4-Menus) 35
[
÷
A
÷
Msystem sd
The TV Guide On ScreerF'_ system in your TV is a flee interactive program guide that uses the infbrmafion you enter during the fi_llowingsetup process to provide you with a channd lineup and program listings fi_ryour area. The listings are automatically updated several times a day.
Note:
• X)umustfil_tsetu/:)yourTVaccorclirijtotheapplieable
•
Ifyouconnecl'eda
7odTbaS)_;_fJio '_'AVHD, loumustperfom_l
the fo/Iowisw T1/Guk/e On &-leen system setup/i-i order to use
the Syr/27io_ full functionality See pages 23 arid 4,9
k)r
det_u/8about AVHD di?lto/ recorders
To set up the TV- Otfide On Screen system:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER.
Configuring the location of your
W
Screen
1:
Sdect the TV location (USA or Canada), and then press ENTER.
Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada) for )'our location (use the Number buttons on the remote control fbr numbers and the A_' buttons fbr letters), and then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.
L
,
A ne'w set o_"
INSTALLATION merm icons appears on-screen (see illustration ac right).
Open the TV GUIDE
ON SCREEN SETUP menu, highlight START, and press ENTER.
4. The fi)lk)wing screen opens. Highlight "Sec up TV Guide
On Screen now" and press ENTER to continue.
Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?
Kyou sdect YES (and press
ENTER), screen 4 appears.
Kyou sdect NO (and press
ENTER), screen 12 appears.
Screen 4: Do you haxe a Cable box connected?
Kyou sdect YES (and press
ENTER), screen 5 appears.
K vou seIect NO (and press
ENTER), screen 13 appears.
5. The _blk)wing screen opens. Press ENTER to continue.
÷
36
HM94(E)03(-39(5-TVGsetup} 36
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04,1:28 PM [
A
÷ L
Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box pktgged into?
If you sdecE ANT 1, screen 6 appears.
lf),ou select VIDEO 1, screen 7 appears.
Screen 9: To a[k_wthe TV Guide On Screen system to find the correct code fbr your brand of Cable box, tune your Cable box _o channd (t2, leave the Cable box and TV ON, and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.
Screen 6: Sdect the channel your TV is tuned to when using your cabIe box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.
Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen system wiII tes_ the code fbr the brand of Cable box you sdec_ed. Do no_ press any keys on the TV, remo_e control, or CabIe box untiI the testing process is comp[eEed. When testing is comp[eEed, screen 11 appears.
Screen 7: The or>screen diagram shows the correc_ way to connect your Cable box to the G-LINK _'*jack on the TV.
Make sure the G-LINK cable is installed properly. For additional details, see page 25.
Press ENTER to display screen 8.
Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to charade[ 09 after testing, sdect YES and press ENTER. If you sdec_ed
ANT 1 in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you sdected
VIDEO 1 in screen 5, screen 12 appears.
÷
Screen 8: Highlight your CabIe box brand, and then press
ENTER to display screen 9.
If your Cable box did not tune itself to channd (t9 after testing and you want to test the same code again, selec_
TEST THIS CODE AGMN and press ENTER.
If you want to test a dif'fbrent code, sdec_ NO and press
ENTER. Screen 10 appears.
Note:/VIc;rg
oat;lel)oxesrequiretestingmote thanone code
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtAT[ON, All rights reserved,
37
A
÷
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system (eo.t .ued)
Screen 12: De you have an ailtenna connec[ed?
Sdec[ either YES or NO, and [hen press ENTER.
Screen
13 appears.
Note: Ifyou selectedNO i/_scleen 3,you mustselect YESin
thisscreento [_oeivea channd lineup andprogf_lmI/stings
Screen 16: The ()n-screen diagram shows the correc_ way [o connect yeur VCR [o the G-LINK
TM jack on the TV. Make sure the G&INK cable is inst0Jled properly. For additional details, see page 25.
Press ENTER [e display screen 17.
L
Screen 13: Are the set[ings cerrec[?
If you select YES, screen 14 appears.
If you select NO, screen 1 appears.
Screen 17: Sdect your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.
Screen 18 appears.
Screen 14: Congratula[ions!
You have cemplet:ed basic
TV Guide On Screen sys[em setup,
the amount
the 1-1/GuideOn .%v_enservice
Press ENTER to display screen 15.
Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, inset[ a [ape (el[her blank or previeusly recorded), and [hen press PLAY. Screen 19 appears.
Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen system will _est the cede fbr the brand of VCR you sdected. Do net press any keys on the TV, remote control or VCR until the testing process is comple[ed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.
Screen 15: Is a VCR cermected?
If you sdect YES, screen 16 appears.
If you sdect NO, screen 21 appears.
÷
38
HM94(E)03(-39(5-TVGsetup) 38
Copyright © 2904 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04,1:29 PM r
A
÷ L
Screen 20: If your VCR stopped ph3qng the tape after testing, sdect YES and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.
Screen 22: Congratub_tions! You ha_e successf'uHycompleted
TV Guide On Screen system setup, Press ENTER to display screen 23.
If3<_ur VCR did no_ stop playing the tape after teMng and
you want to test the same code again, sdec[ TEST THIS
(_ODE AGAIN and press ENTER.
If you want to tes_ a different code, select NO and press
ENTER. Screen 19 appears.
Note:/Vh,
fg IiCRs require
testingfnoiwI<harl
Screen 21: Review the setup infi._rmation displayed on your TV screen (an example is shown bdow).
Screen 23: This screen provides hdpful infbrma_ion on using your TV Guide On Screen system.
Press ENTER _o exit the TV Guide On Screen setup and watch TV.
c{ ,* ;v,_ a _v
, ._ ;,
> *, _ >
}#* >a{
< v >, } a;>,:_,;#,
?
,,
{4>>, {1 {
]{
:{ {}{}{{{
{{}{ {
}1{[
,{
{a
If the infi)nnafion on your TV screen is correc_ for your setup, select YES, END SETUP and press ENTER. Screen
22 appears.
If the infbrmation is incorrect, sdect NO, REPEAT
SETUP PROCESS and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.
TV Guide On Screen
Reminder
The TV Guide Oi) Screen system receives program listings data through your Cable or over-the-air vide() signal In order to receive regular program listings, please remember to do the fbllowing:
1, Leave _he TV in s_andby *node when it is not in use
(such as overnight or when you are
not
watching it) by _urning it OFF but leaving the power cord plugged in,
2,
]Ifyou have a Cable box connected, [eave it ON,
3, Ifg)u have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not in use, (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 13 fbr VCR connection instructions.
If you have more than one (-;able system in your area, you may be prompted to sdec_ which CabIe system's program data to download. If so prornpEed, follow the on-screen instructions,
÷
HM94(E)036-39{5-TVGsetup} 39
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtAT[ON, All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 1:29 PM
39 r
year
Fb_ menu 17_v/9"_t/on/?Jstmot/ons, see Chapte_
4
$decting the menu language Configuring the antenna input
SOUrCeS
You can choose t}om three dif{_rent Ianguages (Ep@ish, French and Spanish) for the or>screen display of adjusmaen[ menus and messages. (The TV Guide On Screen meuas are in English, regardless of the language selected in d_is menu.)
To select the menu language:
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.
2. HigNight MENU LANGUAGE and press ENTER.
3. Highlight your preferred meua language in the menu sidebar and press ENTER.
To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:
1. Press MENU and open d_e SETUP menu.
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new see of INSTALLATION meua icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 bdow,)
q_
4. Press EXIT to dose the PREFERENCES memt.
3. Open d_e TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight INPUT
CONFIGURATION, and press ENTER.
Note:
77_e TFRR£S7-R/AL
frlelw
eT_ly riot L)e
8t)t;'e&_;iL;/e
_ite/rls will be '_v>TyedotJt:) hi SOITleklshfflces (for exzT/rlple,if a c_bM box/s connected to the ANT 1 #iput ofitone
of the dte/r_g TV Guk#eOf?
h-leon setlW
÷
_}Navigate
,_Select
_Back A_E×Jt
4. Press _ to select the inpu[ source (Cable or antenna) for the
ANT 1 input on d_eTV.
Note:/fa
c'_lblebox h connected _bthe ANT 7 input &Jring
TV Guide On Sc/een setup, the entire 7TRRESTR/AL H?el?u bl///If?otbe acceasible, bc/ud/n d the input soume [er ANT L
whM? wi// automaf/_-a/ly dispkly "Cable Boz"
5. Press V and then _
to
select the input se,rce (Cable er antenna) tbr the ANT 2 inpuE on the TV, if applicaNe. If
Sou have not copmected aplything to ANT 2, skip this step.
HM94(E)048
0
40
6, To save your new settings: Highlight SAVE and press
ENTER.
To revert to your original settings: HigNight CANCEL and press ENTER before saving.
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 2:03 PM [
A
÷ [
ProgrammingchanneJsinto the TV'schanneJmemory
When }_oupress CHANNEL A or V on the remote control or
TV front paneI, your TV will stop only on d_e charmds scored in the TV's cham_d memor>
Follow the steps brow to program cha*mds into the TV'._
cha*md memor>
Programming
channeUs
Your TV can automatically detecEall active charmds in your area and store them in its mernor> After the chaimds are programmed amomaticall> you can manually add or erase individual cham_ds.
Note:
* X_ulnustconfl_,umtl_ear_tenrmislputsourcesbefore proclmnTmkTg charffTeL8 Tc_ee page
40)
* 777eautomaticchanne/pmgr_mminclpmeessdoesNOTelase
dTannels that were plev/ous/y progr_lmmed /nto the 7-1/_ rylefi7or_ but adds newly found dTanne£ to _<heex£tilw set of
programmed channels _ mnTove a ehannd from the memory
yOU fTIUSt rTlanuil/Ijl delete/t
_'_ee fText paule_
* 7_JtunetheTVtoachanndnotpmgfammedkTthed_annd rTler77Ol%
VOU iFitJst use the CJiTalllld f_lYlOt8 COIItlDL
/VtJi77/?er
buttOlTS oR the
" P/ogl_wTmbg dTannels br an arTtelT/_abput
corTfll_'Uled br
CABLE win tiske sLbst_sntia/lybnger than for aft antenna/fTput
confl_qumd for ANTENIVA
This i;_noiTna// howevel; once
d}annd
pFo_r_,fTTiTT/Rg
IScorrlpleted jlOtJ shou/cJnot have to
r_/:)eatthe pfogl>7lTIm/£g
processac_a/n
your Cabb TV
sel_//eelineup c'haeulesSidln/ficlmtly
* If you have a C,'nI?/eCARDinserted (page 12) channel
progmnffrTifW for ANT 7 £ dlsabled becnuse tile C'rsb/eC_ARD automatie_ffly loads _tle (2@le d}annd listin/<he TV_ d?annd
memosy
To program channels automatically:
1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.
See page 4() _br de_ails.
2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.
3. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new se_ of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen.
4. Open the TERRESTRIAL meat, highlight CHANNEL
PROGRAM, and press ENTER.
5. HighIight ANT 1 or ANT 2, depending on which antenna input 5ou want
to
program channds fi._r,and then press
ENTER
to
start automatic cham_d programming.
[(_
Scanni_/g cham/÷ls pleage wait
ANT I Antenna
_N_vigate
The TV
will
amomafically cycle d_rough
all
d_e channels channels in the channel memor> Whib _he TV is wring through the channds, the message "Scanning channds, please wait" appears (as shown above righ0.
To cancel channel programming, eid_er press EXIT or highlight ABORT in d_e on-screen disphy and press
ENTER.
When ch;mnd programming is done, press
CHANNEL _ or _ to xiew d_e programmed cham_ds.
<72 @
Channel
Numbers
CHANNEL A
]_/front touchpad
VOLUME MENU
w rsn:;
POWER
÷
HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AN rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04, 2:03 PM
41
[
NanuaRy adding and deUet[ng channNs
in the channeU memory
Af'_er you have programmed fl_echarmds a_L[omaficaIIy, can mammHy add or ddete individual cham_ds in the cham_d meinor},.
To add or delete channels in the channel memory:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP memo.
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new se[ of INSTALLATION metal icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3).
3. Open d_e TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight CHANNEL
ADD/DELETE, and then press ENTER.
Here: ff you have a cable box cofTfTeetedto ANT 1 du//ng
71/Guide On Sc'/_en setup, the 'FERRESTRIALmenu win not
be accessihb and you must then u'_e the T1/Guide
On .lc,/_e/1channd editor to aobZde/ete dTanne/s
To add a channel to the channel memory:
Highlight the unchecked box next to d_e charred number you want to add, and d_en press ENTER [o check the box.
To manually add digital subchannds on a physical channel:
Use the Chatmel Numbers and d_e Dash (-/100) on the remote controI to enter the cham_d number (tbr exampIe,
56-1).
If[he charmel is fi.mnd,the rmmber will be added to the 1is[ and d_e box will be checked.
If d_e cha*md is not tbund, a message will appear.
To remove a channel from the channel memory:
Highfigh[ d_e checked box next to the charred ntm_ber you want to remove, and then press ENTER to tmcheck the
I)OX.
To save your new settings:
Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To revert
to
your original settings:
Highfigh[ CANCEL and press ENTER before saving.
To remove all channels from the channel memory:
Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER, and d_en highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
Note:
* T/fis artier ap_ie'_ to/7?e current antenna input o///jz
To delete/add dlanne/s on the othe_ iepuf, hi@@ht
"
Thisactk)f_cannotbecance/ledun/essyouh_jh@ht
CANCEL and press ENTER before say/rig your d)arlges
4. The iHus[rafion bdow shows chamlds programmed l%r the
ANT 1 antenrm inptm To view the list ofcharmds programmed tbr the ANT 2 an[emm input, highlight
CHANGE ANTENNA and press ENTER,
÷
HM94(E)048
2
42
Copyright @)2804 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_[ON.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 2:03 PM [
A
÷ L
Programmingyourfavorite channels
5qnl can program a maximum of 18 of your t_worite charmds
(9 fTom the ANT 1 irxptlcand 9 fTom ti_eANT 2 irlp_tt) into the
Favorite CharmeIs sets (_wo sets of trine f_vorite chaurlds). Yott can then scan through your flworite chaurMs only, skipping other chaurMs yott do not r_ormally watch.
To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels lists:
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES memt.
2. Highlight FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.
4. To add the channel to the Favorite Channels set:
Use the A_'4 _ btlrcons to highlight an tmchecked box new co a charred you wan; co set as a t_worite, and then press ENTER to check the box.
To delete the chanuel from the Faw_rite Channels set:
Highlight a checked box and press ENTER to tmcheck it.
To clear your favorite channel lists:
1. Press MENU and open the
PREFERENCES li_entl.
2. Highlight
FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.
4. Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER.
5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:
Press FAV CH AV.
Note: _9 _uneyour Dmodte channe/_ fo_ the other antenna
input, you
will need to change No It?put.S_lectiof7
ANT mode bs_:
To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a ninepicture multbwindow (for the current ANT input):
Press FAV SCAN. See page 75 for derails.
Note:
•
_>
tloTe to ;;,chafTrlelfroMs7the FAVS(;ANmode hiqhl/_'hta
window (win be oulTined with a green botde/) a/ld press ENTER
•
Toscanyoulf_vof#echannei'__foftheot/Telantenl_a/rlput, youwi//
I_eed
_b
d?ai_ge dTe&put Selection to the o#lef A NTmode b_ lf)<_u try to add more than 9 flworite charmds per anterma input, an error message appears.
You will need to desdecc a chaur_el betore you can add another.
>
When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
6.
To program fi_w)ritechaurMs tbr the other antenrm irlptm
FitDer._ Highlight ANT 1 or ANT 2, which will change the flworite charred semngs ir_the stetted input. (This will riot change the TV's current input.)
Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1 or ANT2, and then repeat steps 1-6.
ChannelNumbers
Dash
(-)
A
FAVCHA_ i FAVSCAN
Tlal_NIN_
CT4_CCle
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,
43
HM94(E)O40-43(6a-Setup)
43
÷
8/31/04, 2:04 PM r
÷
A
÷ L
The TheaterNet fbature allows you to control many brands of"
IEEE-1394 and/or infrared rernote<ontrolDd A/V devices through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV's remote control
Note:
• Ah'hol_qh
the777eaterNet screen devke
fem'uze unable
thefeatul>son that
device, use
thedevice_ remotecontlo/of the
COfTtfel!_
Of 7 the
device
• For IR pass thmt\qh device control bfo/mation, see "('onnecting
kFmmd remote cof?tlo//ed
(Jel/ioes to the/R
OUT[/Jol<" Oll page
2 7
Open the DEVICES menu, highlight THEATER NET
DEVICES, and then press ENTER.
Navigate _Se]ect _t3.ck
_,_E×Jt
The TheaterNeE Setup menu opens.
Setting up
TheaterNet
AII de, ice types except IEEE-1394 require the fblh)wing seRtp process befbre you can contro_ them using the TheaterNet on-screen icons.
AH CompatibD IEEE-1394 devices are atnomaticaIIy recognized by the TheaterNeE fbature and do not require setup.
Note: .Seepnge 22 for det_dsabout the IEEE 1394per> IfyoL/_
/EEE 1394deviceisf}ot recognized
throtJgh
the IEEE 1384po£ or
ffTletJ_h
{lie
7heaterNetfentu/_,it maybe possibleto set it up tot IR
To set up TheaterNet device control:
1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared remote-controlled device(s). See page 21 for details.
2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menm
3. HigNight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of'INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 4).
5. Using the _t _ buttons, sdect the INPUT the device is connected to.
Note:
Ygher7the input/s change< all unsaved settings
Jvi/Ibe lost
6. Press V and then *__ to sdect the device TYPE.
7. Press _' and then @_ to sdecr the device BRAND
Note:
Whorl selecting a tlew brand, the IR oode will/)e set
I_) 7ere
8. Press _' and then *__ to sdect the device's IR code.
9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.
If the desired IR code is not in the list, press V and use the
ChamM Number buttons to enter the device IR code.
Note:
_)u can find tile IR code _)r you/ device in the
oil sc/_en list or k7the 2?eaten\let device ooo'e t_bb of 7
pages 4U 48
10, Highlight TEST and press ENTER to test whether the device responds to the code.
If"the device does not respond to the code, repeat steps
8 and 9 using another code for the same device.
11. When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To remove a device from TheaerNet:
1, Follow steps 1-5 above.
2. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.
3. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
÷
44
HM94(E}O4Z
-51(6b-Setup}
44
Copyright @)2904 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
A[] rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
[
A
÷ L
Setting up and using TheaterNet'Mon-screen device control (co.ti..ed)
Using the TheaterNet control icons
1. Sec up 3x}urir_liared devk'es in TheaterNet, if3x}tthave not already done so (see page 44).
Note:
I_EE 1394 devices do not need to be set up in
Theate_fl/et because they appea_ mltomatiea//y its the
Theatet#'et menu (7_sshown in step 3 bebw)
2.
Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device central sebcdon screem
The fblhnving are exampbs of'the TheacerNet on-screen control icons fbr _arious devices.
7bshibaSyrnbid'_AVHDrecordercontrol*
_ff
connected a F_shba
SVmSiO'M
AVHD mcotdef; you
must set up t/_e TV Gukle On Screen system in o_(le__buse
the SyfFib/o_ full
[ttdfTOflT)fTa//t_/._ee
O'h_lpter
5 for dot;Ills on settitW up the TV GukTe On Sc/een system See pages 23
8ild 49 for fufthef det;ff/s d_OtdtAVHD dig/tW moofUefs
_, _o®®
J DEVICE
CTRL
__=, {7_3
3, Usirig c}_e at,V@ _ buttons, highlight the device you want co central and press ENTER,
_ll
¢' Video1
1
0
_ Video 3 ColorStream HD1
ColorStream HD2
]
_
*'_ [ Toshiba
Video 2
4. The input automatically changes to the inpttt fbr d_e sebcted device and the device's concrd icons display.
ft;!
]
_7
..................
Highlight the icon f'or the fimcdon you want
co
control and press ENTER,
To select the device's control icons directly:
Press CTRL.
To close the on-screen control icons:
Press EXIT.
To view another source:
Press DEVlC_E and sebcc the input source you want co view.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
HM94(E)O44-51(6b-Setup) 45
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
45
r
÷
A
÷
TheaterNet = i R device cedes
Brand
Aiwa
Bose
C'at-ver
Curds Mathes
Denon
GE
H m_ m/Kardon
JVC
Lea Co_st
gi*m guxman
Magn avox
Ma_:antz
NEC
Nak mdchi
Opdm us
Panasonic
Parasotm d
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
RCA
Re_Iisdc
Sansui
Shtire
Sony
Sotmdesigl_
Technics
Victor
Wards
Km_aM
Memo_cx
Motoroh
Oak
Pace
Panasonic
Paragon
Phtips
Pioneer
PuMr
Qtmsar
Cable boxes
Brand
ABC
Americ_st
Bell & Howell
Bell South
( crater
Director
Everquest
Gem ini
(_-ener_IInstrm_ent
GoldSEar
H m_lin
Hita ch i
Hytex j _sco jerrold
Code
0003, 0(}08,
{11014,
0007,
0011,0017
0899
0014
(t899
0019
0476
0015
0015
0476, (}003, 0276,
0011, 0810
0144
0009, 0020, 0273
0011
0007
0015
0476, 0003, 0276,
0012, 0014, 0015,
0011, 0810
0000
11476, 11116,11276,
0810
0019, 00117
0237
0000, 0107
0000
0305, 0317
0877, 0144, 0533,
1877
0000
0000
46
Code
0406
0674
0269
0300
0160
0078
0892
0331
0892
0269
0165
0269
0892, 0321, 11269
0264
0321
0395, 0300
0308, 0521
0246
0892, (}269
0013, 0300
11892, 0269
03O0
0395
(}321
0264
(}689, 0220
0078, 0211
11308, 0521
0331
0078, (}(}13,0211
0354, 0133
Cable boxes (coat.)
Braed Code
RadioSM ck
Regal
Rembra*_dt
Rtmco
0015
0020, 0275, 0279
0011
0000
S_msung
Scientific Atlanta
Sig_al
Sign _ture sony
S_arcom
Srarg_te
Starquest
St_perc_ble
Tocom
Torx
Toshiba
T.a
United Artists
Zenith
00 ] 5
0015
0276
0012
0003
0000
0015
0007
0144
0877, 0008, 0017,
0477, 1877
0015
0011
1006
0003, 0015
0000, 0525, 0899
CD players
Braed
Aiv, a
Burmester
Code
0157, 0124
0420
(-.'alifbrni_ a_dio Labs 0029, 0£50!5
(2_rver 0157, 0179,11437
Classic
DKK
DMX Electronics
Denon
Emerson
Fisher
GPX
Garr_rd
Gel]exxa
H mna_ffKardon
Hita dl i
JVC
KLH
Kemvood
Koss
K_cll
LXI ginn
MCS
MTC
1297
0000
0157
11873, 0003
0305
0174, 0179, 1325
1296
0393, 0420
0032, 0305
0157, 017_.
0032
0072, 1294
1318, 1372, 1373
0681, 0826, 0626,
0028, 00 B.7,0190
1317
0157
0305
0157
0029
0420
Mag{]avov
Mar m_z
Miro
Mission
NSM
Nikko
O*_kvo
Opdmus
P_naso*dc
Parasound
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
0157,
(}31}5
0626, 0029, 0157,
0180
0000
0157
0157
0174
0868, 0101
1063, 0000. 0032,
0037, 0145, 0179,
03115, 0420, 11437,
0468
0029, 0303
0420
0626, 0157
1063, 1062, 0032,
0305, 0468
0157
Realistic
R£_tel
SAE
Sansui
Sanyo
Scott
Sears
Sharp
Sherwood
Sonic Frontiers
Sol_y
Som_design
TDK
Tascam
Tctc
Tcch_dcs
Victor
\_rds
Yam d_a
Yorx
Brand
Proton
QED
Quastr
R( _A
Laser
disk
players
Brand Bode
Aiwa
Carver
0203
[)e_o_
Disco Vision
Ftmai
Ham_an/Ka_don
Hka&i
0064, 0194, 0323
0059, o 172
0023
0203
0194
0023
Mag_avox
N/I _ra1_tz
Mitsubishi
NAD
Opdm us
Pan,sonic
Philips
Pio_eer
2[kAkAudio
Qttasar
Realistic
Samstmg
Sega
Solly
Tech*dcs
Theta Digital
'f,mHha
0194, 0217
0064, 0194
0059
0059
0059
0204
0064, 0194
0059, 002B.
0194
0204
0203
0323
0023
0193, 0201
0204
0194
0217
Niseelaneoas audio g_and aiwa
Fisher
Code devices
0010,0159,04114
0(}52
0073
IVC
Jerrold
Scie_tific atl rata
0520,{)459
0460
Scnly
Sta[com
0010,([)159,0576
O459
Code
0157
0157
0029
1062 0032, 01153,
0179, 11305, 0468
0764
0179 018(), 0420 o
157, 0420
0157
0157, 0305
0179
0305
0305
0861 0037,0180
1067, 0180
0157
0490, 0000. 0100,
0185 0604, 1364
0145
1208
0420
0174,11180, 0393,
0420
0029, 0303
0072
0157 0053
0888, 0036, 0187,
1292
0461
Copyright @ 2904 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_[OH.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)O4Z
-51(6b-Setup)
46
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
L
÷
F
TheaterNef =I R device codes {co.t..ea]
Video accessory (RDTV decoder)
Brand
Code
Panasonic
Pioneer
PAn<eton
1120
1010
0113, 0295
Samsung
Sensory Science
8h_rp
1190
1126
1010
Receivers
Brand
ADC
Ahva
Alto
Anam
Apev Digital
Arc_m
Audiotronic
Audhwox
1257
1120
1189
1390
Bose 1229
Cambridge Soundw(_rks 1370
Capetronic
C_*ver
C'asio
Cladnette
0531
1089, 1189, 0042,
0189
0195
C'ompa q
Curds Mathes
D_ewoo
Denon
0195
1136
0080
1250
Fisher
G_rr_rd
H _rm m/Kardon
Hewlett P_ckard
11(}4, 116(1 0004,
136(}
(}(}42, 1801
0463
0110, 0189, 0891
1181
JBL
] VC
KLH
Kenwood
Koss
LX[ gasonic ghm
Code
0531
1(189, 1405 0121,
(1158, 0189, {11405,
1388, 1641
139(1
1609
0110, 1306
(}074, 1374
139O
131}, 1027, 1570,
1569, 0027, 0042,
(}186
1366
0181
1798
0189
Lloyd's
MCS
Magnavox
Ma_antz
Modul fire
MusicnHgic
Nak mAchi
Onkvo
Optim us
Pan:sonic
[bnnev
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
0195
0039
1089, 1189, 0189,
(}195, (}391, 0531
1089, 1189, 00}9,
0189
0195
1089
0097
0135, 0842, 1298
1023, 0042, 0080,
0181, (/186, 0531,
(}670, 0738, 0801
1518, 0039, 0309,
(1367
0195
1089, 1189, 1269,
(}189, 0391 1120
1023, 0014, 0080,
0 ] 5(1,(}244, 0531,
(}63O, 1384
0189
Receivers {cont.}
Brand
Proscan
Quasar
RCA
Re distic
S:mstmg
Sansui
Smvo
Sharp
Sherwood
Sony
Soundesign
Stereophonics
Sun fhc
Tcac
Tcclmics
Thorcns
Venturer
Victor
Wards
Yam:ha
Yorx
Zenith
Code
1254
0039
1023, 1254, {)080,
0531 1390, 16{i}9
0181,0195
1295
1089, 0189
08()1, 1251
0186, 1286
0491 05(/2, 1653
1058, 1258, 1158,
0158, 0474, 1367,
1558, 1658,1758
0670
1023
1313
0463
1308, 13(/9, 1518,
0039, 0}09
1189
1390
0074
0014, 0080, 0158,
0189
0176, 0186, 1176
0195
0857
Satellite receivers
Brand
Code
Alph_Smr
( haparral
Crossdigkal
Dish P_:o
Echostar
Expmssvu
GE
Proscan
RCA
RadioSMck
SKY
0772
0216
1109
1005, 0775
1005, 0775
0775
0566
GO[
General [nstrument
HTS
Hita ch i
0775
0869
0775
0819
HughesNetworkS)_tvms 1142
JVC (}775
Magnavov
Memore×
0749, 1749
0724,
0724
0722
Mksubishi
Motoroh
New Level
Panasonic
Pays_E
Philips
0749
0869
0869
0247,
0701
0724
1142,
0749,{i}724,
1076,
0392
0722,1749
0392,
0143
0869
0856
0566,(}855,
Sre]sung
Sony
Star Choice
T{}shiba
Uniden
Zenkh
11()9
0639
0869
0749,
1053,
1286,
0790,1052,
1054,1285,
1287,1289,
1749
0724, 0722
0856, 1856
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFIATION, All rights reserved,
VCRs
Brand
Admiral
Adventur_
Aiko
Aiwa
Akai
America Action
Code
0048, ()209
0000
0278
0037, 0000
0041
0278
0035
0240
America_ High
Asha
Audbvox
Beaumark
Bell & Howell
Broksonic
0037, 0278
0240
0104
0184, (}121,0209,
0(1(12,(}479, 1479
0072 0278
0037
CCE
C'alix
(2_non
Carver
Cineral
C'kizcn
Colt
Craig
Curds M:thes
0035
0081
0278
0037, 0278, 1278
0072
0037, 0047, ()240,
0072
0060, 0035, 0162,
0041, 0760, 1035
0240
Cybernex
Daewoo
Denon
Dvn_tech
Electrohome
Electrophonic gmercx gmersol_
0045 0278, 1278
0042
0000
0037
0037
0032
0037 0184, 0000,
0121,004 }, 0209,
0002 0278, 0479,
1278, 1479
Fisher
Fuii
Funai
0047 0104
0035, O033
0000
GE
0(16(},0035, {)240,
0760, 0807, 1(135,
1060
Garr_rd
Go Video
0000
0432
GoldSmr
(}r_dbn_e
0037, (10}8, 1237
0000
0047
HI-Q
Harley D:vidson
M_gnasonic
0000
H:rman/Ka_don
H_rwood
HeadqtHr_er
Hkadfi
HughesNetwork!3stems
0042
IVC
0067 0041
Jellsei1
0041
KEC
KLH
Keen
Kenv, ood
Kodak
EXI
Lloyd's
0081, 0038
0072
0046
0000, (}042, 0041
0037, 0278
0072
0693
0067, 0041,0()38
0035 0037
0037
0000
Logik
MEI
MGA
M(;N Technology
MTC
0072
0035
024(L 0043
0240
0240, 0000
1278
HM94(E}044-51(6b-Setup) 47
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
47 r
÷
A
÷
TheaterNet T°I R device codes Ccomi..ea)
VCRs (cont.}
Brand
Magnavox
Magnin
Mar _ntz
Marta
Matsushita
Memore×
Minoka
Mitsubishi
Motorola
Muldtech
NEC
Nikko
Noble×
Olympus
Optimus
Orion
Panasonic
PenneT
Pentax
Philco
Philips
Pilot
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Prof]tronic
Proscan
Prorec
Pulsar
Quarter
Quartz
Quasar
P,CA
RadioSt_ _ck
Radix
Randev
Realistic
ReplayTV
P,unco
STS
S mlsung
Sanky
Sansui
Sanyo
Code
0035 (/039, 0081,
0000, 0149, 056 _.,
1781
0240
0035, 0081
0037
(}035, 0162, 0454
0035, 016Z 0037,
(1048, (}039, 0047,
0240, 0000, 0104,
0209, 0(}46, 0454,
0479, 1037, 1162,
1237, 1262
0042
0067, 0043, 0807
00}5, 0048
0000, 0072
0 I04, 0067, 0041,
0038
0037
0240
(}(}35
1062, (1162, 0037,
0048, 0104, (}432,
0454, 1048, 1162,
1262
0 ] 84, 0209, 0{)02,
0479, 1479
1062, 0035, 0162,
0225, 0454, 0616,
1035, 1162, 1262
0035, 0(/37, 0240,
0042, 0038, 1035,
1237
0042
0035, 0209, 0479
0035, 0081, {11618,
1(181, 1181
(1037
0067
0081
0240
0060, 0760, 1060
0072
(}039
0046
0046
0035, (/162, 0454,
1035, 1162
0060, 0240, 0042,
0149, 0760, (}807,
1035, 1060
0000, 1037
(1037
0037
0035, 0(/37, 0048,
0047, 0000, 0104,
0046
(1614, 0616
(}(}39
0042
(}240, 0(}45
0048, 0039
0000, 0067, 02(/9,
0041,0479, 1479
0047, 0240, 0104,
(}(}46
VCRs (cont.}
Brood
Scott
Se_rs
Setup
Sharp
Shintom
Shogun
Singer
Sonic Blt_e
Sony
Sylvmi_
Code
0184, 0045, 0121,
0043
0035, 0037, 0047,
0000, 0042, 0104,
0046, 1237
0045
0048, 0807, 0848
0072
0240
0072
06 ] 4, 0616
0035, (/032, 0000,
0033, 0636, 1032,
1232
0035, (/081,0000,
0043, 1781
Symphonic
TMK
0000
0240
Tamng
Tuac
Technics
Tcknika
Thomas
Tivo
Toshiba
Totevision
U*fitech
Vector
Vector Research
Video Concepts
Videom _gic
Videosonic
Vilhin
Wards
0041
0000, 0()41
0035, 0162
0035, 0037, 0000
0000
0618, 06}6
(}045, 0043, (}845
0037, 0240
0240
0045
0038
0045
0037
(}24(}
0000
0060, 00 _.5,0048,
0047, (/081,0240,
0000, 0042, {)(}72,
0149, 0760
White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278
XR_ 1000
Yam_ha
0035, 0000, 0072
0038
Zenith 0(139, 0000, {:1209,
0033, 0479, 1479
DVD pmayers
Brand
Aiwa
Apex Digital
Audiolog[c
B & K
B] ue Parade
Broksonic
DVD2000
Daewoo
Denon
Emerson
Enterprise
Fisher
GE
GPX
Go Video
Gradiente
G wenhill
H_rman/Kardon
Code
0641
0672, (/717, 0755,
0794, (}796, 0797,
0830, (/856, 1100
0736
0655, 0662
0571
0695
0521
0784
0490, 0634
0591
0591
0670
0522, 0717
0699, 0769
0715
0651
0717
0582, 0702
48
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
DVD players (cent.}
Bk,_nd
Hkachi
H[teker
JB>
Code
0573, 0664
0672
0702
0558, 062 _.,0867 jvc
KLH
Kenwood
0717
049(I, 05 _.4,0682
0737
Konka
Koss
Lasonic
Magnavox
Maitre
]_{aralltz
Microsoft
Mint&
Mksubishi
Nesa
New Base
Norcellg
Onkvo
Orkron
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Iblk Audio
Pdnceton
Proscan
RCA
Rotel
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Satlyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Sony
Sylvmi_
Technics
Techwood
Thet_ Digital
Toshiba
Ticdex
Urhan
Concepts
XBox
0711, 0719, 0720,
0721
0651
0798
0503, 0675
0782
0539
0522
0717
0521
0717
0826
0872
0503, 0627
0651
0490, (/632, 1362,
1462, 1490
0503, 0539, (1646,
0854
(1525, 0571, (1632
0539
0674
0522
0522 (1571, {11717,
0822
0623
0823
0698
0573, 0820
0695
0670
0630
O633
0533
0533, 0864, 1533
0675 {:}821
0490
0692
0571
0503, 0695, 1045
0800
0503
0522
HM94(E)04z
-51(6b-Setup/
48
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
[
L
÷
Setting the AVHD device skip time
When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive) device, such as the Toshiba Symbio _''AVHD recorder (modal
160HD4), to one of the TV's IEEE-1394 ports, you can use the
AVHD device skip time Dature to set the number of minutes the device will skip fbrward or backward when you press the
SKIP buttons.
Note:
•
This TV will wo_? best with tile 7_>shiba
Svm_o
'_'AVHD _eco_der
(inode/760HD4],
fo_ _ecofding h/_/h definitkm and standard de_7._itionqlatelfal f?olTi e/filer tiJne/ arid for contfol/ie£j five 71/
(pauseJf_wied/etc)
VVhe/1the AVHD mcotdet /s connected to the
TIt, tile remote contlo/ ke_s (LIVE, ST-DRREW, PAUSE, #LAY, e/c)
af_ automatically actiw_ted to a/low p¢_usiegof live T1/
ff you connect a _)shba _l_[o 'MAI/HD t_cotdel; you must set up i'he FV Guide On .%'/_en sj/__ternis/order to use d?eSyfntJio _ Pd//
functiona/iB/ See Chapter 5 tot details on settilW up the TV Guide
On Sc'/een system See pages 23 and 49 [or _ufthet dehff/s about
AVHD d_?ta/ f_cotdet_
• I/Vhen you connect all AVHD (or a D VNS) device the TV Guide
On Sc'/een systern 1:_automatk-a/ly conf_jumd to allow mcof_ling
.lee page P._'for device connection bteimation .lee Chaptels 5
and 7 f_._rdetails about setting up and usi/w the TV Guide (Jn Screen system
To set the AVHD device skip time:
1. Press MENU and open the
"
2. Highlight AVHD SKIP
TIME and press ENTER.
3. Press W or A to select the
AVHD skip time and press
ENTER.
Setting the
HDMP' audio mode
To select the HDMI audio mode:
1,
Press MENU and open the
_, _ /_
_ _,
2,
Highlight HDMI AUDIO
SELECTION and press
ENTER.
,
Press V or A to select the
HDMI audio mode (Auto,
Digital, or Analog) and press ENTER. (Auto is the recommended mode).
See '%orH_ecdr_gan HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input" on page 19.
Setting the time and date
Note: ff you a#eady set up the TV GukJe On Screen
SJ/sten?, the
i'ime and cl_£ewere set automatically and you cnn skip this step
To set the time and date:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)
3. Open the TIME AND DATE merlu, highlight
START SETUP, and press ENTER.
/
Navigate _Select [,_gack _/_E×it
If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen system, the
[blIowing screen will appear. To se_ the time, highlight
TV GUIDE ON SCREEN and press ENTER. The TV
Guide On Screen setup sequence will start, and the time and date will be set au[omaticall>
Note:
• /fyou highlight TV GU/DF ON SCREEN (uhove) to set the i'iole and date thmlLgh the TV Guide On Sc/een sysl_m arid a
powe/ outage occult:, the t#ne and date wi// be updated
automal%,a//y when i'he powe/ is f_stof_d
• ffyou h/igh/iqht MANUAL (above) to set the time and dare manually and a power outage occult, you will lose the _/ine
and date se??ingswhen the power is f>stot>d
•
ff}/ou manually set the time and dm'e and then perform TV
Guk/e On St'teen setup, the manual/fine and dglte settings
will be ovefifotJen /)y the T1/ Guk_'eOn Sc/een settings
49
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)
49
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04, 2:09 PM
[
÷
Viewingthe CaNeCARD" menu
A CableCARD enables you to view encrypted digital channds,
See page 12 fbr connection and subscription infbrmation,
After the CableCARD is inserted, a CabIeCARD option appears in the APPLICATIONS rnenu, with informationaI screens provided by your digital CableCARD service (see illustrations below).
Setting the Quick Restart feature
With the Quick Restart fbature set to ON, the TV stays in Low
Power Shutdown mode fbr several minutes after the TV is turned off (see Notes below).
If the TV is turned on fl'om Low Power Shutdown nmde, the flu11picture appears immediatdy.
To set the
QMck
Restart feaure:
1. Press MENU, and then press "_ or II_until the SETUP menu appears.
2. Press A or _' to highlight QUICK RESTART, and then press ENTER.
3. A side menu will displa> Highlight one of the side menu items and press ENTER
to
display the infbrmadon.
g
To view the CableCARD menu:
1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS
2.
Highlight
CableCARD and press ENTER.
menu,
3. A side menu will display. Highlight one of the side menu items and press ENTER to display the information.
Note:
Yhe (?_bloCARD menu has no use_ a@_stab/e options
af?dIS
lot/f?_)fmS_/_)f?_J/DtOf)OSeS
OI)l_Z
Note:
ff (2uiek Rest_tt is set ib OFF and you tlee off the Tk' it cnn take
severn/seconcZs for the p/ctle e to appeat when you tlee on i'he
TV agab
If C),uickRestn_tis set to ON and you turn off the TI_ the following will occur fo_ a tow minutes
•
The semen (bffW lights dim/3z
"
Tile
_21]s COfTtiF]Ue _0 ftJl?
This is a function ell<he Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown Inocle
and is not a TV maffunction
/@ou do not pro?e/this, set I'he Quicl(
Restart featu/ e to OH_
W_en the Quick Restrict teattJf_ is set
_)
OFF, i@ou mpeatedlv turn the TV of?and off ill a short pedod of trine, rite useful so?vice/if,_ of
the/_ffnp m_y be d_orte/ _'hanthe average usdu/ service life See
page 98
÷
50
HM94(E)04z
-51{6b-Setup)
50
Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA COFIPORA_ION.
All rights reserved.
÷
8131/04, 2:10 PM
F
Viewingthe digital signal meter Viewingthe system status
Yolt can _iew d_e digkal sigrml meter fbr ANT 1 and ANT 2 digkal TV input sources only.
To view the digital signal meter:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP men,.
Z HigNight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of INSTALLATION men. icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)
To check the system status:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP merit:.
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set of'INSTALLATION memt icons will appear on-screen, as shown iri step 3),
3. Open the SYSTEM STATUS menu, highlight SYSTEM
INFORMATION, and then press ENTER.
3. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, high[ight SIGNAL
METER, and press ENTER.
_Navigate _NSelect _,_Y_Back
4. Use the _ _ buttons to scroll through the memt bar to check the Product Inf_)rmation and Sof'rware Version.
_Navigate K_tSelect _J_Sack _;._Exit
4, Use the AV4 _" buttons to sdect the ar_terma input and digital chamld whose signal you want to check.
Note; The
phi/sited
4//iq/tgd channel numbe_ &ted in tl_e5;ignal
Mete/ screenmay not co_mspondto a vi£ual FVchannel
/lumbet: Contactyour /oca/bmadcastet__) obtgdnthe RF channd numbe/stot your local d/9'/ta/s_alYof?s
To close the screen and return to the TERRESTRIAL menu:
Highlight OK and press ENTER.
To rett_rn to normal viewing:
Press EXIT.
To close the screeu arid return to the INSTALLATION menu: Highlight OK and press ENTER.
To return to normal viewing: Press EXIT.
Restore Factory Defa_Rs
To restore a[[ se_dngs and cham_ds to their f_ctory def_ttlt
_a[ttes:
1. Follow steps 1-3 aboxe.
2. Use the @ _ buttons to scroll through the menu bar to sdect FACTORY DEFAULTS.
3. The screen bdow [eft appears. Enter your PIN code (or
0000 if"no PIN code has been set). T'he screen bdow right appears.
To cancel the reset: Highlight NO and press ENTER.
To continue the reset process: Highlight YES and press
ENTER. The TV svill tttm off automatically af'_era fbw seconds. Af'_erthe TV turns off',tmpIug the TV power cord and then pltig it in again to complete the restore.
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)
This window provides the ability to reset the TV settings•
Type in your PiN now (ol "0000" if no PiN has been set) to lestole settings to their actory de au t va ues.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8131/04, 2:10 PM
[A
PressYES to confilln After the TV tu,ns off, unp]u0 it and pk,0 it
51
[
÷
eracd e program
The TV Guide On Screepd_'_system is a flee, interactive, on-screen prograrn guide bulk in to your Toshiba TV d_at _ists schedules and infbrrnation fbr TV programs in your area.
Note: Ovet the 8if el eob/e 8cc'essto st;itio/F eotry/itg TV Guir/e
0/7 .%'_eer/dictais mqui/ed for tl£ TV Gukle On Sereen system to
o/)ef2ffe TV Gz/i(/eOn Sereee dath is t_otplow?led/)y 7&hi@ Ameffeo
()Ollst/mef R,educts, L L C
(TACP), therefore. TA('P is not bible br the
corgerg of sl/eh rl_t_t The dora provider m;!y e/eet to discorgirll/e the
sefvic_ or it may cease to be (or never be) avoi/oble i/_yeul area b a/y
of these e//eumst_tnee&the TV &l/de Of7Sereen featl/fe will not fu/Idbn
consequences arising,hem customers havieg used or net beif_gable to t/se t/?/s sel v/ce
The TV Guide On Screen s) stern includes d_e following f:oatures
Streamlined
on-screen assisted setup--QuickIy and easiIy see up your TV Guide On Screen system using the on-screen prompEs (see '_Set@_gup the TV Guide On Screen system" beIow).
Prepare listings"and INFO wk_dows--Scroll
through eight days of TV listings and view program informauon such as rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.
. _tch
TVand
display TV Guide ()n &teen inf!_rmation simultaneous@
* Channd
lin_up customization--Customize
D_eup so 3>mrfiworite stations are listed first.
your cha*md
DDect tuning--Direct?
tune the TV to a current program
3>_uwant to watch by selecting it in the program guide.
Reminders--Schedule
show reminders that wilI either di@ay an (m-screen notification harmer or automadcaIIy rune the TV to the channd of"the show tbr which }_m see d_e reminder.
Recording--Easily
schedule recording of one or more programs.
@viee
f equi/ed for rec'of_Lc_.q
instmdk)ns in CIwpter 2
: Search_Search for shows by category, keyword, or alphabetically,
" On-screen hdp--The TV Guide On Screen system contains on-screen tcamre definitions and navigation insmlcfions.
To open the TV Guide On Screen system:
While watching TV, press the TV GUIDE buttopl on the remote controk
--or--
H_ql
* Press MENU, open the
APPLICATIONS menu, higNight TV GUIDE
ON SCREEN, and press
ENTER.
Setting up the TV Guide Oil Screen system
Follow these instructions to set up d_e TV Guide On Screen system so it can receive current program data fbr your area.
Note:
If you move the TV tea different ZIP/post./code,
you will need to petfoltn the TV GU/DE ON SCREFN SETUP process to
mcon@um your 71/Guide On Sc/_erl system
If you have
not
already connected your antenna, cable box, aud/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection instructions.
1,
Press MENU and open the SETUP memo
2,
Highlight INSTALLATION and then press ENTER to open d_e INSTALLATION menus. (A new set of'menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 4 beloxv)
Open d_e TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SETUP menu, higNight START, and _hen press ENTER.
mcof_l/r]g
clev/ee tO
use the TV Guide On .S'c'/_er,,sj/_ste,
one to_/c'htecotd//W feature It is mt;omtl_ended t/?atyc)tJ con/_ect your dev/ees according to the connection bstmct/ons
in CI}_g)ter 2
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revisio_ of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibRed o_der the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, a_d may sabieet you to civil and criminal liability,
!
{:{
Navigate }_}8elert _gack k_Exit
4. Go to Chapter 3 tbr instrucuons on completing the setup,
Read this chapter fbr details on using the TV Guide
On Screen interactive program guide.
52
HM94(E)O5_-55(7a-TVG) 52
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA][ON.
All rights reserved.
_ 8/31/04, 2:20 PM
[
÷
A
÷ L
Navigating the TV Guide On Screensystem
While
watching
TV, press
d_e TV GUIDE button to enter the TV Guide v_,_
On Screen system. The w.¢_
LISTINGS screen will appear with the current show highlighte&
When in the TV Guide
On Screen system, if.you press d_e TV GUIDE button from any screen the TV will tune to the show displayed in the Video
Window.
c_,0,:_
,:._
'_',,,r,_
Use the arrow keys on the remote control (AV"_ _) to highlight any show, and then press ENTER to tune to d_at
sho'vv,
Scroll left or right (_ _) p_, a¢_ to view eight days of listings, c_,__,,_u_v;,
Press MENU to display a pand menu wkh options fbr the currendy highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders,
To access another Service screen:
1, Press A to highlight the Service Bar.
2. Press _1 or _" to highlight a difffrent Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,
SETUR SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).
3, Press Y to use that Service.
Note:
Helpful/?/om_at/on about each Sefv/ce appeats /?_the/rite Box
TV Guide On Screen remote control functions
BUTTON
TV GUIDE
Numbers
- (digital separator)
MENU
INFO
ENTER
_. _'_i _
PAGE U P/DOWN
REC
SPLIT and 1_
FUN(,_ION
• When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen system and higblights tbe current show listing.
. Wben in the 11/Guide On Screen system, returns to watching TV and displays the sbow in the
Video Window.
• For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and cbannel editing,
• For entering digital cbannel numbers.
.
Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind, keyword).
• Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Sewice screen or otber type of screen.
, Makes a selection or executes an action.
, With a currently airing show listing high@hted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the sbow channel.
• Witb a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu witb viewing options.
• Provide directional control.
• When watcbing TV, _. and _' provide surfing through cbanneb turned ON in tbe LISTINGS screen.
• When in tbe TV Guide On Screen system, moves from one set of scleen infornlation to the next, when applicable.
° When in tbe TV Guide On Screen system or watching TV, initiates tbe recmding process.
• Wben in the TV Guide On Screen system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video
Window.
•Jurnp forward and backward one day in the UST]NGS screen.
- (digital separatoO
MENU
-
IV GUIDE
PAGE
DOWN
_'_ and _ -
REC
-
SPLIT-
9v9 [UN
PICMOD_
, :_,_,#e
Note:
o fllB TV &side On 5"creen rllenus sl_own in ff_ls manual ale fol
iNustratlon pu/T£)ses only The channels, pfogm/71s, and
TV &side On &>men in_Jmlatlon
as illushated m_v not be
avail;_ble in your area Flee options and _earules as illustf_#ed
af_ sulJjeot to ehaBge /vhen UfPd;ffms are downloaded hem the
fV
&did{¢
OnScreenservicereyou/TV
•
The TV Guide On Screen intefadiwe pfo_/mm
gLlide_ supf_oH5
eYe, the all broadcast3/t
does not pmwde
//stings _of satellite
servIceS
Numbers
© ® ®
® ® ®
[WD CLEA£
FAVSOAN FR_ZE
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
53
HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG) 53 _ 8/31/04, 2:20 PM [
÷
A
÷ [
* When
you
open the
TV Guide On Screen s3%tem,the current program appears in d_e Video Window.
As you scroll through the listings, the Video
Window wi[[ change
to
display d_e sdected program.
The bck/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.
You can set the Vide<)Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to change chamlds (unlocked) as you navigate d_rough listings.
To lock/unlock the Video Window:
Press the SPLIT button on d_e remote control to toggle between locking and unlocking d_e Video Window.
--or--
Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press
MENU to display the opdon to lock/unlock the Video Window.
Panel Nenus
A panel rnerm appears:
- when }<mpress MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options are avaihble); or
- when you press ENTER on a show starring in the furore.
- when F)u press VCR+ while watching TV (when the TV Guide On
Screen is not open).
When a pand naenu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.
* Press Eodisplay hdp tbr d_e current pand menu,
* Press A and V to move among the options.
. Press _ and _" to move u) adjacent options or, ifd_e highlight is on a odometer, to change the odometer choice.
* To move the highlight to the deflmh command burton, press ENTER f'rom an odometer or entry box.
* To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the command buEEonand press ENTER.
. To cancel any changes and close d_e panel menu:
- press MENU; or
- highlight Cancd and press ENTER.
* Ira panel menu contains more options d_an can be displayed in one pand, the word "more" appears at the bottom of the menm To access d_e additional options, eid_er scroll down using the Y button or d_e
PAGE UP/DOWN (CH AT) burton.
54
Default
Buitor_
Odometel
Copyright @?2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORAEION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)O5J-55(7a-TVG) 54 _ 8/31/04,
2:20
PM
Info Box
ParcelMenu
[
÷
A
÷ L
lnfo Bo×
An Irffb Box contains irffbrmafi(m abo_E a show, Service, or Pand Ad, or provides genera_ he_p (for example, f{.}ra pane_ menu).
, An hlf'o Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have ttp to three sizes: Small, Large, or '{No/'
- Press INFO on the remoEe controI to cyde among the sizes.
- The defiuk Infb Box size is SmaIl. To change the defauk size, open the
SETUP Service screen.
The hffb Bu_Eonicon ( _ iNFO)appears on tI_eInfo Action Bar ifd_e hffb
Box size can chai_ge and/or if there are addkional hffb screens. Press the
][NFO key on the remo_e control to change the size and/or to display additional hffb screens.
][nsome instances, the INFO bttrton on the remote control is used to page fbrward (fbr exampM if there are additional pages ofirffbrmation in a Pand
Ad, a Channd Ad, or hdp text).
Bar
Small hffo Box
/
Large hffo Box
TV
Guide On Screen icons
1{20N NAME
Info Button
DESCRIPTION
° Additional h_foBox infom_ation is available, or the hfo Box has additional sizes.
Progress
• Elapsed time in currerlt show.
• Progress bar appears in LISTINGSand SEARCHand when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.
HDTV • Show is presented in high-definition TV,if available.
New
Stereo
• Show is new O_ota repeat}.
° Show is available in stereo.
[xl
DIGITAL
Dolby Digital , Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).
CC , Closed captioning is available for the show.
TV Rating ° TV rating for the show.
Record Once • Show is set to Record Once.
° Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),
Regularly, and Weekly.
Record Off
_ _
• Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).
Record
Suspended
, Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.
RemindOnce
°ShowissettoRemindOnce.
Regularly, and Weekly.
Remind Off
_ _
, Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).
Remind
Suspended
• Show is Suspended due to a schedtde conflict (show remains in Schedule).
° Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.
_
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOFtATION, All rights reserved,
55
÷
TVGuideOn ScreenSe ices
The TV Guide On Screen system consists of five main services:
LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, arid SETUR
OfTIJ/ /OtJ[
LISTINGS screen
* When yott open theTV Guide On Screensystem,LISTINGS
is ahvays the first service
displayed.
* Use the Number keys on the remo_e control to jump to a specific cha*md's listings.
* To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press
ENTER.
* To dispIay the Episode Options pand menu fbr a particular show, highlight a show and press ITfENU.
* With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screen.
* Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS to do the fbllowing:
- View eight days of show listings
- Read show descriptions
-Ttme
direcdy to a show currendy airing
- Se_a show to Remind (e.g., start time, f'requency, automatic power ON, auto-tune TV)
- Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, f'requenc3O
- Lock arid unlock the Video Window
- Access panel ads arid cha*md ads
Episode Options panel menu
From the Episode Opdons pand metro, you can choose to see a recording, set a reminder, or tune to the cha*md. The fbllowing are descriptions of"the buttons.
GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the memt, changes rio irdbrmation, and returns to the Service Bar.
TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Gtfide
On Screen system and tunes _o _he channd of the highlighted show (if'the show airs in the ft_ure) or tunes to the show (if the show is currendy airing). The but_on label changes according to whether the show is currently airing or not.
SET RECORDING: DispIays the Record Options panel menu, f}'omwhich you can se_ the show to record. For additional infbrmafion, see "RECORDINGS screen" on page 59,
"SCHEDULE screen" arid "Record features" on page 60, and
"Remind features" on page 63.
SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel memo, fl'om which you can set a reminder fbr _he show. For additional infbrmafiori, see "SCHEDULE screen" arid '_Record [bamres" on page 6(t, and "Remind fbatures" on page 62.
CANCEL: CIoses the metro, changes rio infbrmation, and returns to the highlighted show.
56
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA3[ON.
A[] rights reserved.
÷
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
SEARCH screen
SEARCH allows you to find shows b.vkeyword or category
(alphabedcaI, HDTV, movies, sports, children, e&tcafional, news, _ariet)_ series).
Example:
Category
search
1. From the SEARCH screen, press Y to highlight a category
(in this example, MOVIES).
With SEARCH highlighted ir_the Service Bar, press INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO agairl to dose the screen.
2. Press V to highIight a sttbcategory (ir_this example, ALL).
Use d_e arrow keys to move d_e highlight wkhin SEARCH.
3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by date and time.
÷
4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now) or press MENU" to displa.vthe Episode Options panel menu. (See "Episode Options pand menu" on page 56.)
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
57
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
SEARCH screen (continued)
E×ample: Keyword search
Keyword search lets )ou enter a word(s) to find a partic_lar show by category or fbr every show title tha_ ma_ches.
1. From the SEARCH screen, highlighE KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.
2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the pand menu, and then
,tess ENTER.
6. A list of a[[ matching shows ft_r that keyword is dispkffed.
7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.
Then highlight a specific [isung and press ENTER to watch
(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options pand menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can choose to se_ a recording or reminder, or tune to the channel (see "Episode Options panel mentt" on page 56.)
,
The Search Options panel mepm opens. Highlight
CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a ca_egor.vto search (AI[, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).
.
After high[ighung a category, press V to highlight ENTER
KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.
,
The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight a character and then press ENTER to display it. When finished entering a[[ characters, highlight DONE and press
ENTER.
The TV Guide On Screen system stores all tl_ekeywords you creaEe,
To edit or delete a keyword:
From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, high[igh_ the keyword you want to edit or ddete, and then press MENU to display the Search Opdons pand menu, with the fbllowing options:
- GO TO SERV_{CEBAR: C[oses the menu, changes no information, and returns to the Service Bar.
- EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you can change _he keyword.
÷
- DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmauon pand menu. Sdec_ YES to delete the search or NO to dose the pand menu.
- CANCEL: Closes the pand menu, changes no infbrmadon, and re_urns to the highlighted show.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
58
A
÷ [
TVGuideOn ScreenServices([continued)
RECORNNGS screen
The RECORDINGS service screen disphys a list of'previ<sly recorded or ct*rrentIy recording shows on an IEEE-1394 recording device connecEed to the TV (see ChapEer 2).
Note:
Rf--CORDIN(_S" will not appear kt tile .C,:e/viee J/ou
have an IEEE 1394 video fd.'nt c/irlg cJevieecnnnected to one of the
IEEE 7394 poft_ on tile. TI/._ee (_/lap2f 2 [or cJet_i/s
f--orackl/t/ong c/mr;J/s,see 'Red'old featu/es"on page 60
* With RECOR[)INGS highlighted h the Service Bar, press
INFO to display a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screen.
To view a recording, you can do one of the following:
* Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The episode either starts fTom the begmnhg or fTom where it was last stopped (if viewed previot*sly).
Highlight an episode and press MENU to disphy the
Episode Options pant menu, with the fblbwing options:
- GO TO SERVI(-;E BAR: Cbses the mentl, changes no infbrmation, and returns to the Service Bar.
- RESUME: Starts from the beginrfing er f'rom where it was last stopped (if viewed previottsly).
- PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts f'rom the begmnhg, even if'stopped previottsly.
- DELETE EPISODE: Ddeces the episode from the
RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording fTem the
IEEE-1394 recording device. A Confirm panel taunt* displays. Press YES to ddete the episode or NO to close the pant menu.
- (;ANCEL: Closes the pant menu, changes no information, and rerttrns
to
the highlighted show.
To choose the way recordings are displayed:
1. Highlight RECORDINGS on
the
Service Bat', and press
MENU to disphy the Recording Options pant menu.
2. Press AV to choose between ViewAs and Sort By, as described bebw.
View As: Press @_
to
choose between the {bllowing:
List--Disphys every recorded episode {br a show (see example in Screen B, at right).
Note: It;Listview,higlJicdht
an
into
Box with dTow ifTfolrrlation Press MENU to c/Isp/aJl the
ET_isoc/e(JptiofTspant menu (see "_ulsocJe CTptlons
panel menu" of7page 5b_7
" Oroup--Disphys recorded shews with)m Iisting every recorded episode (see example h Screen A, at right).
Note:
In (_togJpview, hiJ_liqht a show and pfeg_s_NT_-R
D VieW a StJOTOlaly
ofFJ/f_cotFJed
577ows
/2less
EN7-2R
_gaklI'oco//;/pse
list
Screen A
Screen B
Sort By:
Press @ and _ to choose between the following:
* Title--Disphys recorded shews h alphabeEicalorder (see example h Screen A, at right).
* Dae--Disphys recorded shows by date and time, with most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).
3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
then
press ENTER again te dose
the
pant monet and disphy
the
recordings with
the
sdected options.
The
unautborized mcordhg, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is pmbibited under the eopyrigbt Laws of tbe United States and ether countries, and may subject you to dvil and criminal liability,
Copyrigllt @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rigllts reserved,
59
÷
A
÷ [
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
SCH EDU LE screen
The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or ddete Record and Remind events you set previou@,
* With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press
INFO te disphy a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screem
Record features
You can set a show to Record in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and
SCHEDULE, or change Record settings fbr a show in
SCHEDULE. There are three ways to set a show to Record.
1) Set
a
show to Record using the REC key on the remote control
Press the REC key on the remote control to record the show Once with current def_udt settings (start and end recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change the Record frequency (but not the defhuh settings) among
Once (&tim1[), Regular1> Week1> and Cancel
Note; Thefelg_tedRecordicon appeo/won the show t#e
erichtime you pressRE(;'See "Recordicon&"of? page 61
2)
Set a show to Record from a panel menu
1. I Iighlight a show and press MENU to disphy the
Episode Options pand menu.
2.
Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER [o display the Record Options panel menu.
* Highlight an event and press MENU to disphy the Schedule
Options pand menu, with the fbllowing options:
- GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no infbrmadon, and returns to the Service Bar.
- WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen system
6O and tunes to the highlighted show.
- DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from the schedule. A Confirm pand menu disphys. Press YES to delete the recording or NO to close the pane[ menu.
- EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can change existing recording infbrmatkm.
- SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a reminder fbr the show (Record is not cancdIed).
- CANCEL: Closes the pand menu, changes no infbrmadon, and returns to the highlighted show.
An icon identifies the event type. For mere details, see "Record
[batures,"a[ right, and "Remind [batures" on page 62.
3. Highligh[ the FREQUENCY fidd, and press @ or _ to choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Offi
4. Highlight the START field, and press @or _ to cheese in the range from 12(t minutes early
to
12(t minutes late or On Time (defimh = On Time).
5. Repent step 4 for the END fidd.
6. Highlight the RECORDER fidd and press _1 or _ to choose the recording device.
Note: Fo:connected reco:diflg devices onlj_
7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press _ or _ to choose how long you want to keep the Record event.
Note:
Fo_ connected/EEF recomfng devices onlj_
8. Press ENTER
to
highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, and press ENTER again te close the menu.
A Record icon fbr the selected frequency appears on the show tile. See '_Record Icons" on page 61.
Note: f--o_ fec'o_ding devices onl)_
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to dose the menu, change ne information, and return
to
the highlighted show.
Note: X_u
can change thede_lultv;#ues
Optiotls pnnd menu
fields.See
"Change deh_ult options"
onpage8&
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
÷
A
÷ L
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
Record features (continued)
3)
Manually set a show to Record
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press
MENLO"to display the Schedule Opdons pand menu.
Press AV'_ _ to move through the options.
Press the Number keys or AV'_ _ to change the infbrmadon, as necessar>
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press
ENTER to display the Record Opdons pand menu.
3. Enter d_e infbrmation in the panel menu fields. For details, see "Set a show to Record f'rom a pand menu" on the previous page.
Note:
Fd>en setttn_j a MarlugJ
_coordiR_L _/?e opt/oR
"Osi/j/"
/s avoiff_bleinstead of "Requl_ffJ_"See "Record icon& "below
t_ql?t, for8 desclfplTot_
of Recoe/Mons
4. When finished entering the in[brmation in the fidds, press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING, and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Record icon fbr the selected f)'equenW appears on the show tile. See "Record Icons," below right.
Note:/V/anuo/recording
is//kted f_)lchannel humidor
Or
highhght
CANCEL arid press ENTER to cIose the menu, change no information, and return to the highlighted show.
Recording notification banner
* If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.
If the TV is on and you are watching the charred that is set to record, the recording occurs as scheduled.
If the TV is on and you are watching a charred od_er d_an the one that is set to record, a r_otificadon harmer (illustrated below) appears on-screen befbre recording starts. At that time you can choose to start or cancel recording.
The defimk highlighted item in the r_otificadon banner is
"Change charmeI; start recording." If'no change is made within 3 minuees, the notification harmer will dose aueomadcalI> d_e charred will change to the one set to record, and fl_e recordirlg will occur as scheduled. If you want to cancd the recording, select "Don't change; cancd recording" in the notificatior_ banner and press ENTER.
Record conflict
A conflict message appears fbr the fbllowing reasons:
A show seeto Record overIaps with any part of another show previously see to Record.
A show set to Record overIaps with a show previousIy see to auto-tune. (For auto-rune deeails, see "Remind t:camres" on page 62.)
Select one of these options:
Record Arw_vay--This show will override an existing show set to Record or auto-tune.
, Doo't Record This Show--Cancds the Recording.
Record
icons
Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear on the tile fbr a show see to Record.
Record Once {_--Records the show one time.
r
_
Record Regul _rI) _._
--Records the show every time the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.
* Record Weekb_, --Records the show e_ery dine the show airs on the same day of the week and on the same channd, and starts at the same time.
* Record Daily --Records the show every weekday
(Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.
Note:
>is icon c}ispl,vysfor manuel fecotrJirsgsofff_z
" Record Suspend _--Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
* Record Off
The mmuthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs,
videotapes,
DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the UnRed States and other countries, and may sabiect you to civil and criminal
liabiJity.
Copyright _') 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved, show in the list but will not record this show until the f'requenQ_is changed.
61
÷
A
÷ [
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
Remind features
You can set a Ren_inder to perfbrrn the fbHowing ffmc[iorls:
Automatically turn on the TV (if off) a(,the schedubd reminder dine, arid rune (,heTV to the chanrie[ of (,he show fbr which you set the reminder.
Au(,oma(,icaHytune the TV, a(,the schedubd reminder time,
DispIay an or>screen no(,ification banrier (ren_indirig
you
tha(, the show is about (,o star(-),
f}em
which you can choose te tune (,heTV (,o(,he show's channel or cancel (,he reminder.
You can so(,a show reminder in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and
SCHEDULE, or change the settings fbr a show reminder in
SCHEDULE. There are two ways (,e set:a show reminder.
1)
Set a show Reminder from a panem menu
1. Highligh(, a show and press MENU (,o display (,he
Episode Options panel menu.
2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER (,o display (,he Remind Options pand menu.
icon l%r the sdec(,ed frequency appears on (,he show (,ib.
See "Remind Icons"
on
page 63.
Or higtdigh(, CANCEL and press ENTER (,odose (,he menu, change rio inf'ornmtion, and re(,urn to the highlighted show.
2)
Manually set a show Reminder
1. Highligh(, SCHEDULE in the Service Bat', and press
MENU (,odisplay the Schedub Options pand menu.
Press A_'@ _ (,omove through the options.
Press the Number keys or AY@ I_ (,ochange (,he irffbrma(,ion, as necessar>
2. Highligh(, NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press
ENTER to disph) (,heRemind Opdons pand nlentt,
62
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press @ or _ (,o chose among Once, Reguhr1> Weekly (or Dail> if se(,ringa Manual Reminder), or Offi
4. Highligh(, (,he POWER ON TV fidd, and press @ or
(,ochoose ekher Yes (to turn on the TV au[omadcaII> if o< a(,the schedubd Reminder (,ime) or No (deEmk).
5. HighIigh(, the AUTO TUNE TV fidd, and press "_ or
(,ocheese either Yes (to autemadcally (,une(,heTV to the channeI you are se(,ting (,heReminder fbr at the schedubd Reminder (,ime; (,heTV mus(,be on at (,he
(,ime) or No (del%uk).
Note: You can change
#_edefaultvaluesof theRemind
Opl'ions pane/menufieldsSee
"C71angecJetmdtopt/Prls"
on page65 forderails
6. Highhgh(, (,heWI-IEN fieId ((,oset a (,ime for dispIaying the reminder screen), and press _1 er _ to choose in the range fi'om 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On
Time (defimk = 1 minute earl),).
7. Press ENTER (,ohighligh(, SCHEDULE REMINDER, and press ENTER again to close (,he menu. A Remind
Copyright ('0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. For demiIs, see "So(,a show reminder f}'om a panel menu," at bf'<
Note:
Whe/7 fallowing the opt/of7 "Dai/y'/s
&stewed
"Regulodjz"
See"Re/rlbd
icon& "on
the page,fof a desc/ipl'iol;_ ofReminde/
4, When finished en(,ering the infbrmation in the fidds, press ENTER (,ohighligh(, SCHEDULE REMINDER, and press ENTER again (,odose the menu.
A Remind icon fbr the sale[led fi'equency appears
on
(,he show die. See '_Record Icons" on (,he fbllowing page.
Note: Mg_nual me/is_ed by
channelnumbe/:
Or highligh(, CANCEL and press ENTER (,odose (,he menu, change rio information, and re(,urn to the highlighted show.
÷
A
÷ L
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
Remind features (continued)
Reminder notification banner
Based on your option settings, a rlotification banner will appear or>screen, if'yottr TV is on at [}'_escheduled Remirlder time.
A[ that time 7)u can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder barmer, or highiigh[ the show and press ENTER to rune to t}',e show.
If"no choice is made within 3 minutes, the rlodficatior_ barmer doses atltoma[icaHy and comp_e[es t}',e}',igh_ighteditem (def_mk is HIDE REMINDERS).
Note:
If more tka. two _wninde_ af_ set &_ the s_me fffne,
8FTOWS8p[)e_lf OFt 177ef_ef,q/rlr.!el rlo_/f/(;L_tiof?
b_nnei: P/ossA_f
toh_l/@htthed?o_s
Remind
icons
Following is a descriptiorl of the Remind icons that will appear on the tile fbr a show set to Remind.
" Remind Once --Displays a show reminder one time.
Remirld Reg_tk_rly_ --DispIays a show reminder every time the show airs on the same charred and starts a[ the same time.
Remind Daily _ --DispLays a show Reminder ever) weekday (Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.
Note:
>is icon disploya fo_ manuel _er,nirlde_ onl_z
Remind Stt._
--Show is Suspended dtte to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
Remind Off the show in the list but will riot display a reminder un[i_ you change the f}'eqttency.
Remind confJict
A conflict messageappearsfbr the fbHowing reasons:
. A show set wkh an at_to-t_meReminder hasd_esamestart
time as an existing au[o<mle Reminder.
A show set with an al4o-tune Reminder ovdaps with a scheduled Recording.
Sdec[ one of"these options:
Au[o-Ttme Ar4_vay--This show will override an existir_g
ShOW set to atlto-tttne,
Proceed, No Au[o-Ttme--Se[ d_e show as a Reminder bttt do llOt atl[o-ttlne.
* Dodt Set This Remir_der--Cancds the Reminder.
÷
HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG) 63
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AJl rights reserved.
q_ 8/31/04,
2:82
PM
63 r
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
SETUP screen
After you cornpIete the inkiaI TV Guide On Screen setup (as described in Chapter 5), you can change the fi._Howingsettings:
" Change system settings
" Change channd dispL_5,
* Change det_aukopuons
Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and fbllow the on-screen instructions.
With SETUP highIighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to dispk9, a hdp screen. Press INFO again to dose the screem
Change channel disNay
This option allows you to edit channd infbrmation that appears in LISTINGS, including the fi_llowing:
* Reorder the position the channds appear in LISTINGS.
* Change the "tune chamlel" number.
Note: The "tunechannd"/}
flTe
a station Fo/examp/<
two viewers/n the same z/_; code may
moe/ve fl_e same station on d/_emnt channel numbe[_, depending on whether they have Cabb serv/be of am t_/bg a
cable box
* Switch a channel to one of the following seuings:
-
On (channd is ahvays displayed in LISTINGS)
-
Off (charmel is never displa.ved in LISTINGS)
- Auto-Hide (channd is displayed in LISTINGS only when program infbrmation is availabb)
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL
DISPLAY and press ENTER.
Chaage system settiags
This option appears only after you have compbted the initial
TV Guide On Screen setup process (as described in Chapter 5).
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM
SETTINGS and press ENTER.
2.
Press ENTER again to display the Grid Options pand llleilu,
3. Highlight one of the opuons, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen instrucdons,
2,
Press ENTER again to display the
Confirming Your
Settings screen.
3. Highlight one of the options, press
ENTER, and fbllow the oil-screen instrucdons,
64
HM94(E)06_ "65(70-TVG) 64
Copyright ('0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOF/A7 ION. All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 2:33 PM
[
÷
A
÷ L
TVGuideOn ScreenServices(continued)
SETU P screen (continued)
Change defauR options
This option
allows
you to change defiuflt settings in the fbHowing categories:
, Genera_ Defluk Options
" Record Defluks
" Remind Defiuks
General default options
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
Record defauRs
1. From d_e SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to display the Record Defauks pand menu.
2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULT OPTIONS and press
MENU to display the General Defimlt Options pand
111entt,
Enter the required infilrmafion in the pand menu fields
(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long [o keep a
Record event, the quality of the recording). See "Record fbatures" oi1 page 60 fbr de[ails on entering values in these fidds.
When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose the merm and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL [o close the menu wkh no changes).
Remind defauRs
1. From d_e SETUP screen, highIigh[ CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to display the Remind Def_mks pand menu.
3. Enter the following iIdbrmafion in the pand menu fidds:
BOX SIZE: The inkial Infil Box size when you open the
TV Guide On Screen system. Choices are No, Small
(de_mk), Large, and Last Used.
BOX CYCLE: The Infb Box size rotation wher_ you press
[NFO oi1the remote central when d_e TV Guide On
Screen system is open. Choices are No Orfl> Small Oili>
Large Orfl> No & Small, No & Large, Small & Large, and All (def_mk).
" AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide On
Screen system when d_e TV is powered oi1. Choices are
01t
(defiu*k) and Of£
Noge:.gettheAUTi9GU/DEto
Off ff you do notwnntthe
TVGuideOnSoften system to opeslevesyt/1778 ttJrfl
on #_eTI/
3. Enter the required information in the pand menu fields
(power On TV, auto-tune, when [o display the Remind screen). See "RemirldDatures" oll page 63 tilt details oi1 entering vahles in d_ese fields.
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose d_e menu and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL no changes).
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and press ENTER again to dose the menu and accept the changes (or highlight CANCEL to dose the menu with no changes).
Copyright O 2804 1"OSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
to
close the menu with
65
HM94(E)O62-65(7c-TVG) 65 _ 8/31/04, 2:33 PM r
÷
A
÷ L
SeJectingthe video input source to view
To select the video
input source to view:
1. Press INPUT on the remote contrd or TV/VIDEO on d_e
TV ffon_ pand.
2. Press 0-7 to se[ec_the inpu_ source you want to view, depending on which input jacks 3xm used for connecting your devices (seeChapter 2).
The current signal source displays in d_e top right corner of the INPUT SELECTION screen.
off
6¢/_o 2q
_F O_[orSi;_ort_
HL/MI
/D_
Note:
•
While the IsTputSelection sc/een is open,
you
a/8o can _se the _,T
bu_ons
on the
buttons
on the
f_mote cofTtf()/
(OF the Ohannd_
front pan@ to d?ange the/TIpU[
• While 171e
press the/NPUTbutton
of 7the f_/note con?m/ot the F1//V/DEO
button of?the TV front pand to d_afwe the if¢)u£
• 21selectan/EEE Z394 bputsouroe,
press the Theater?Jet
DEVICF buttof7 of? the ;_mote cont/d (see page 26 & 44)
•ffan IEEE 1384 device is the ctJlT_nt klput, it will aN;eat at the
bo_ofTi of the input Sebct/on ilL,t howeve/; it will be f_/nol/ed f/otFi
the listif?he bput soufc'e is dTae_'ed
• X_u can/abd the video bput soumes accofdieg to the spec'i_L" devk;es you have connected to the T1/ (see next pngej
•
Tile soume can be 'Ttidden" See page 67
tot debris
be abb
to
change if?putsdtJdng
f_Coldie 9'
ff you use a device other than the 71/_ ?emote centre/to start
f_cordied and then change bpu_s, the t_corded atJdio and video
may be affected
W/VIDEO
Remote control
TV front touchpad
CHANNEL _'A
Numbers
INPUT
A
POWER
÷
HM94(E)068
6
66
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA] ION. All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 2:36 PM [
A
÷ L
LabeJingthe videoinputsources
You can labd each video input source according co the B,_>eof device you connected list of'labds: to each source, from the tbHowing preset
- - (d<fk.ll &Dd)
Hide
(so
Dideuss...sed i.t.,._ i. lDeS.t.,._.$'ele_do.
Audio Receiver
VCR
Video Recorder
Laser Disk
Compact Disc
DVD
DTV
Sacdlite/DSS
Cable
Input labeling example:
If you connecE a VCR
to
VIDEO 1, a DVD player to
ColorScream HD-1, and a high definitkm sateIlite receiver to
HDMI, and then label the video input sources accordingly (as shown in step 4 at left), when you press INPUT or TV/V{DEO, the INPUT SELECTION screen would look like
the
screen below right:
Note:
•
If you set
up
devices in Theater?\let,Tr_the associated inputs _ee automatically lilbebd and cannot be fe/uDeled urlU/you remove
the devk'e from Tl?eaterHet (see page 44)
•
If you set
up a
cable box in WDEO L
it will automatically be labeled and c'r;,nnotbe re/obe/ed
Ur]ti/ yOU
r_ITTOV_
the device frenl the TV Guide On
• X_ucnllnot select IEEE 1394 devices thmlKqh the INPUTSELECTION
windobx howeve/; yau can select and contie/ IEEE 7394 Uevices
thiolLqh TheateetJet (see page 44)
To label the video input sources:
1. Press MENU and open
the
PREFERENCES
menu.
2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.
3. Press _' or & co highlight the video source you want to label
Input Selectionscreen with no inputs labeled
Input Selection screen with inputs 1,4, arid 6 labeled, and input 5 hidden,
To clear the input labels:
1. Press MENU and open
the
PREFERENCES menu,
2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.
3. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.
4, Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
a ,* gZN
_S
Note:
L_;belsfor devk:es you set up kl 771eaterNetwill not be
cleared unti/ you remove the device Dora TheaterNet (_ee
page 44) The screen above f/}'ht i//ust/ates an example of the
input Labeling sc/ een a_er it was reset that still shows the
VCR label _r VIDEO 7 because d_e VCR v>_sset up in
Theater#'eL
>
Press _llor 1_ to select the desired label for that input source.
If a particular input is nor used, you can select '<HIDDEN" as the label, which will cause chat input co be '<grayedout" in the input Iisc arid skipped over when you press the
INPUT button on the remote control.
Note: ff you select "HIDDEN" for all of the input/abe&
U)e
POP feature wi2be c/isab/ecLif you theft attempt to access the
POP featur_ rite message "Not avnl7Jble" w12appear on street7
5. To save the labels, highlight SAVE and press ENTER,
67
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)
67
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 2:37 PM
÷
Tuningchannels
Tuning to the next programmed channel
To tune to the next programmed
channel:
Press CHANNEL A or V on the remote control or TV
Dent panel,
Note:
•
Th/sfem_ui_willnetwer1<unles_yeupregran_channelsintotheTV_
channelmemoly
(see
page
4
0
•
Ifyouusethe
T1/_
r_motecantle/tostrut
recording
yau willnot
be ablete
d?ange
thedTanne/
recording1
r_cordinu andthee d?ange
thedTarlneL via'cowillbe thatall'lie
CUrTent/y tuneddTanne/
atJdieand
[
U
Channel label
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return
The Channel Return tbamre allows you to switch beEween two channe[s withouE entering an acma[ chatme[ number each rime.
1. Select the first channel you want to view.
2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons
(and the dash (-) burton if selecting a digital channel).
3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous channel will display.
Each rime you press CH RTN, the TV will switch back and fbrth between the last two channels that were selected.
Note:
If you press CH R_V fie/n a non antenna input, the 7V will t ettJm to the/as>v/ewedANTk_put and channe_
Using SpeedSurf to change to a specific programmed channel
Note: 7hisMaturewill not warJ(unlessyeu pregrT_mcharnels
into the TV_charted menTo/y(seepage 40
1. Press and hold CHANNEL A or T fbr a tbw seconds. The
TV will enter SpeedSurf mode.
Switching between two channels using
Upperchannels t
Current channel (highlighted)
Lower channels
2,
RepeatedIy press or hold CHANNEL ,A or V whiIe the
SpeedSurfmode is on-screen to scroll through the channel list. Release d_e button to display d_e highlighted channel.
The St_trfkock TM tbature temporarily "memorizes" one channel in the CH RTN button, so )ou can return to that channel quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN,
To memorize a channeI in d_e CH RTN button:
1. SeIect the channel you want to program into the CH RTN bUEEOn,
2,
Press and hold CH RTN fbr about 2 seconds until the message "Channel Memorized" appears on the screen. The channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.
3. Continue to change channels until your desired channel is selected.
4. Press CH RTN, The memorized channel will be selected,
The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.
Once you press (-;H RTN and then change channels again, the
CH RTN button memory will be cleared and the button will fimction as Channel Return, by switching back and fbrth between the last two channels that were seIected.
Tuning to a specific channel
(programmed or unprogrammed)
Tuning analog channels:
Press the Channel Number burn)ns ((t-9) on the remote control For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.
Tuning digital channels:
Press the Chanr_eI Number buttons (0-9) on the remote centre1, tblIowed by the - (dash) buEron and then the su/>channel number.
For example, to select digital channel 125-!, press 1, 2, 5,-, 1.
NOte:
ira CI/_/tHI channel is
not programmed
either tlffolLqh the automatic d?annd scan (page 4 0 or tire d?aend
add/debte function f_page42) you win ?}avete Lqne the RF
dlannd usyY@'
r_mote cantloL
"__
CHRTN
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPOBA] ION. All rights reserved,
_ CHANNELa,/T
HM94(E)068
8
68 _ 8/31/04, 2:37 PM [
÷
Selecting the picture size
You can view many program fi)rrnats in a varie[y of'picture sizes--Natural,
TheaterWidd* 1, TheaterWidd _ 2, TheaterWidd _ 3, and FttH--as described bdow and on the rlext page.
The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary depending <)*1 the ibm)at of the program you are viewing. Sdect the pic[<iresize that displays the current program the way that looks best to you, &e "Notice r_'possib[e
adverse @ets on TVpieture
tube," below right.
To select the picture size;
2, WhiIe the Picture Size menu is or>screen, press the corresponding number button ((t-4) to sdec[ the desired picture size.
Note;
• Yourv/socr;,nr_pe_l_d/ypr_ssP/CS/Zf:_se/ect#_edes/r_dpk;'tures/2e
(or pr ess the AY buttons on the remote cent/or while the Picture Size so'teen is opel_J
• "f-gd"may not be avablb/e tot some progt>m torfnaL_ (:wf//be '_/ayed out" in i'he Picture S/2eso'teen]
Natutam
picture
size
. The image is displayed dose to its originally fbrmatted proportion. Some program formats will display with side bars and/or bars at the top and bottom.
Natural picture sizeexample:The way the image displays will vary depending onthe format of the program you are currently watching.
See'Notice of possible adverseeffects on TV picture tube" at right.
Conventionalpicture on a conventional TV screen
Conventionalpicture in Naturalsizeon your wide-screen TV
EA mT
ChannelNumbers
-PICSiZE
÷
HM94(E)O66-75(8a-UseTV)
69
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8131/04, 2:37 PM
69
F
A
÷ L
Selecting the picture size (co.ti..ed) lheaterWide _
1
picture size (For 4:3 format program)
* The center of'tbe picture remains cIose to its origbml proportiom bttt the lef'r and rigbt edges are stretched wider to fiiI the screen,
21select the picture s/2e, press P/C SIZE on the r_mote control
X_ua/so can select the p/ettJr_ s/2e using the
menu sy:_tem Sehct PICTURE SIZE in the
VIDEO / TNEATER SETF/NGS mentz
TheaterWide
2
picture size (for letter box programs)
The picture is aretcbed wider to fiII the wi&h of the screen, but only s_igbdy stre;ched taller.
* The top and bottom edges of the picture are biddem To view the bidden areas, see
"Scrolling the Tbea[er Wide picture" on page 71,
TheaterWide 1 picture sizeexample
TheaterWide 2 picture sizeexample
TheaterWide
3
picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles)
The picture is s[re_ched wider to fill the wi&b of the screen, but only sbgh@ stre[cbed taller,
The top and bo_[om edges are hiddem To view the bidden areas (such as subritles or captions), see "Scrolling the TheaterWide picture" on page 71,
Theater Wide 3 picture size example
FuR picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs oNy)
" Kreceivirlg a 4:3
f'orma_
program, it is stretched wider m fii[ the wi&h of"the screen, bu[ rlo[ stretched taiier,
None of the picture is hiddem
©O
O
Full picture size example
Copyright (0 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserve_d,
Note:
• /fyouse/ectooeofthe
TheaterWhlep/cture
s/2es, the _bp and bottom edges of the
be hhldell
_ view the hidden edges, either
scroll the picture CYheaterWhle2 aod 3 on/y)
or
try pfOglFff??
b rid//Of N_UtJ/_II pietur_
size
•
When sehclir W the p/r:l_Jm s/2e, the way the image displays will vary depend/r W on the format of he pmgrs, m you am
(-tuTerTI/ywat(;,hhW See
"Notice
of po&sib[e adverse effects on TV
picture tube"
be!ow.
Using these functions to change the picture size (i,e,, changing the height/ width rati@ for aw purpose other than your private viewing may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United
States andother countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability,
HM94(E)068
O
70 _ 8/31/04, 2:37 PM [
÷
8crNling the TheaterWide picture
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 oNy)
You can set separate scroll settings for TheaterWide 2 and
TheaterWide 3 modes.
To set the scroll settings:
1. Press MENU and open d_e VIDEO metal.
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.
Usingthe auto aspect ratio feature
When the AUTO ASPECT fbature is set
to
ON and one oldie fbllowing input sources is received, the picture size is automatically sdected (as described in the table below):
A 480i signal from d_e VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.
A 480i or 480p signal from the HDMI input.
3. In the PICTURE SIZE fidd, sdect either TheaterWide 2 or TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).
4. Press Y to highlight the PICTURE SCROLL rid&
5. Press 4 or _ to scrolI the picture tip and down as needed, fi'om -10 to +20.
;'i_
a* {>
4:3 normal
4:3 letter box
16:9 full
Not defined
(no ID-1 data or )
HDMI aspect data]
Natural (with side bars]
TheaterWide 2
Full
User-selected picture size
[see pages 64-65]
Note:
• TheAU7-OAgPFCTfe_tumisr_otapp/ic;_bletoantennaor(?;_hleinput
SOtJfC_S
, 2_eAUTDASPECTfeatum is notawti/able when the POP
double window/s open, the FREEZE mode is active, of the TV Guide
Of? ._cl_e/l
system iS
ape/7
% turn on the AUTO ASPECT feature:
1, Press MENU and open the VIDEO metro,
2, Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.
6. To save your scrolI settings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To save your scrolI settings permanendy, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
÷
3. In the AUTO ASPECT RATIO rid& select ON.
4_ To save your settings temporaril> highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To save your seuings permaner_dy, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)
To turn off the AUTO ASPECT feattu:e:
Sdect OFF in step 3 above.
Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 2:37 PM
71
A
÷ [
Selectingthe cinema mode
(48( i signalsoNy)
When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed) f}'oma DVD phyer connec(,ed (,othe ColorStream HD1/I-ID2
(componen(, video) or HDMI inputs <1,1the TV, smoo(,her mo(,ion can be ob(,ained by se(,(,ingthe CINEMA MODE to
FILM.
% set the CINEMA MODE to FILM=
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.
Selecting the lamp mode
You can select either the HI BRIGHT or LOW POWER hmp li]ode,
The HI BRIGHT mode is usdhl when addMonal picture brigh(,ness is desired
(such as ii1 a brigh(, room).
The LOW POWER mode re&tces wear on the projection lamp. Using d_is mode should resuh in h)nger hmp lifb.
See "Lamp uni(, rephcement" on page 98-!00.
To select the lamp mode:
1. Press MENU and open d_e VIDEO memt.
2. I Iighligh(,THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. In the CINEMA Iv{ODE field, select FILM.
3. hi d_e LAMP Iv{ODE field, select HI BRIGHT or LOW
POWER, whichever you prefbr.
4. To save ylur se(,rings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To save your se(,rings permanen(,ly, highligh(, SAVE and press ENTER.
To set the CINEMA MODE to VIDEO:
Sdect VIDEO in step 3 abo_e.
4. To save ylur se(,rings temporarily, highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To save your ser(,ingspermanentl> highligh(, SAVE and press ENTER.
÷
HM94(E)068
2
72
Copyright (-c)2084 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM [
Using the POPfeatures
Using the POP double=window feature
The POP (picture-ottt-picture) double-wirldow feature spIits the screen into two windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.
To display a program in the POP window:
1. Select the program yott want to watch in the main window.
2. Press SPLIT to open the POP window.
Main POP window
Note:
* Wher_theniainwirsdowisintheANT1
orAIVT2
mode, the ANT7 arid AN72 ieptA5 cannot be
selected tot fl}e POP windo_
o When thema/n wiiidowisin Video 1/2/3,
(-.'o©rStl>am HD 7/NDZ or HDM/ mode, those illput,._cannot be selected fer the POP window
* _)U caflnot View IEEE 1394 sotJlc'e programs b
the POP window
o Youcannot view two video or two antenna soumes
b both the main and POP windows s//71L_lt_neotas/3_
(You can view a video soume b one window and an alrterlna soume b the ethel:)
Green border
(denotes active window)
3. Press _ to highlight d_e POP window (will have a green border).
4, Press INPUT to open the Pop hlpttt Sdecdon window. Select d_e input sottrce fbr the POP window by pressing d_e corresponding Number button (0-7).
The current source displays in purple in the Pop Input Sdecdon window.
Numbers
INPUT
÷
/ i _._i_'! ¸_¸¸'_ • • _ • _ • _
To close the POP window and tune to the currently highlighted window:
Press ENTER after highlighting the window yo, want to view as a r_orma[ pictttre_
To close the POP window:
Press SPLIT or EXIT.
Notes
about
recording:
* When the POP window is open and you st;lrt recordird, the POP window
win close and r>cuding
will sturt
" Ifyou use the TV_ r_/77otecontrol to sl??rtr_cord/ng, you will not be d_le
to operl the POP window ff you a_empt to do so, the message "Not
Avai/ub/e" win appear on_cmen
, /tl} recon?mended thatyou use the TI/'_ remote cent/el to start
r_cord/i.sg
ff yOtJuse a device other dian tile TV_ r_/note control to sl?lrt
r_cordiRg,
yOUInay be able to open the POP window du/fng the
recording process If this happen& die recorded auofo will r_f/eot tlie audio of the active window (inak7 or POP), whMI may horde the audio
_/()tJbtended _br_corcL
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)
73
(Ca-) _ C¢-3 _j
©
'SPLIT
Copyright O 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 2:38 PM
73
[
A
÷ L
Using the POP features (co.ti..ed)
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP}
WhiIe d_e POP window is open, press 4 or _ to swkch the so,rid (main or POP) that is output fi'om d_e TV speakers (and f'rom d_e VARIABLE AUDIO OUT and
AUDIO OUT jacks),
The window with d_e active sound is oudined wkh a green border.
Example: Press _1 Example: Press 1_
-FREEZE
Freezing the main picture in the
P0P
double=window
1. While the POP dottble-window is not open, press FREEZE. The POP window will open, displaying the main picture as a sdlI picture.
2. Continue to press FREEZE repeatedly to refi'esh the still picture in d_e POP window, which acts as a slow "strobe" oldie program in the main window.
Note:
77}eFREEZE feature is not avail@/e
#hen the POP win@w £ already
open
If you
pf_ss FREFZE w/}ell the POP window is open
tile message "A/ot aw#/_@le"will appear:
÷
Still picture
To close the still POP window:
Press EXIT_
HM94(E)068
74
74
Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM [
Using the POP features (co.ti.uea)
POP double=window aspect ratio
The POP ctouble-wir_dow fbature displays each picture accordir_gto its input sigm_I aspect ratio, as illustrated brow.
480i 480i
Note:
The AUTO ASPECT RATIO feature (page 7 73
does/7ot opet_te in POP double w/?_dowmode
V
- ENTER
Using the favorite channel scan feature
You can use this f?ature to quickJy scan and ttme the cham_ds you programmed as f_worite cham_ds in a nir_e-picture mu_ti-wir_dow_
Note: 77/efavorite clear,fie/scarteatu_ will not wc)fRunlessyou programchanlle/uhire _he
f_lvr)rited?am_dmemory (see "Pmg/_mmingyour f_lvr)tfted?a/inels"on page 43]
To scan and tale your favorite channels;
1. Press FAV SCAN, The TV automatically enters multi-wirldow mode and begins a nine-picture scan of your f_worite charmds fbr the current ANT inptm
To view your f_worite charmds for the o[her arl_erma input, you wiII need to change antenna inputs ill'st (page d7), and then press FAd SCAN.
FAVSCAN
11 _ 13
ABLE1 8
2. Press A_'_ _ to sdect one of'the nine pictures, which becomes a moving picture
(the active window). (The main picture is a_waysmo_ ir_g,)
3. Press ENTER to disp_a?the charred you sdected in step 2 as the main picture,
!J
_, 6 11
Notes about recording:
•
WhentheFAVSCANmu/thwindewisopenandyc)u_?ytost_u;*t_corclins_.
themessrv[_e "NotAw)il_lhle"
will appem on sc/_en _)u will slot be able to sl?ut r ecordislg until you close tile FAV SC/IN multi wislclow
• ffyou use the TI/_ f_lTiote control to st;lit [_corcJifzg.
windo_ ff you
attempt to
do
so, _<hemes\_age '?VetAv_J/ilb/e While Recordi/w"wi// appear on scl eef7
•
It/stecommendedt/iatyouusethe TV_/emotecontfeltost_lttmcording Ifyouuseadeviceothetthan
the 7]/'_ [_Hiote c'ofitld to start fw:or dlil?g,you [rlay be ai)le to open the f-7_VSCAN multl winclew clu/ing
the mcordirlg process ff this happen& the mr'order audio asld video win reflect the audio and video of the
active wirlcJow,which may not be
wliot
J/OU ilitel?dJediT)[_COl(Z
Copyright © 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV) 75 _ 8/31/04, 2:38 PM
75
r
÷
A
÷ L
Adjustingthe picture
Selecting the picture mode
You can sdectyour desiredpicture setth_gsfrom fbur picture
modes, as described below.
Adjusting the picture quality
You can adjust the picture quality (comrast, brightness, color, tint, and sharpness) to your personal pre_brences.
To adiust the pictt_e quality:
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.
2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Press _ or _ to sdect the picture quality you warn to adjust
(CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR, TINT, or
SHARPNESS), and then @ and _ to adjust the setdng, as described in the table bdow.
To select the picture mode:
Press PIC MODE on the remote control The fbllowing popup menu appears or>screen.
C'L_L. uLk_3 __,mj _
{_Navigate _Select _[_Back _ _£xit
Repeatedly press PIC MODE
" to cycle among the modes.
Pig
MODE-
To select the picture mode using the menu system:
1_ Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu_
2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.
contrast brightness color tint sharpness lower darker paler reddish softer higher lighter deeper greenish sharpe_
4. To temporarily save the new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To permanently save the new settings, highlight
SAVE and press ENTER.
3. Press _' to highlight she bfODE field, and then 4 _ to select the mode you prefer.
4. To temporarily save the mode you selected, highlight
DONE and press ENTER.
Of7/_/ (ANT
7b tl_eexampb above_ _u carsselectciifferent
settirtgsfor eachklput selection
The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the
PREFERENCE mode (see '<Sdectir_gthe picture mode," above left).
Note: Temporarily saved settings wiiI apply until the
.........................
Resetting the picture settings
To permanerltly save the mode you selected highlight
To reset the picture settings to their [actory values;
SAVE and press ENTER.
Note:
1. Highlight RESET in the Picture Settings menu and press
ENTER.
• Thepk;turemodeyouselected/s/orthecurren_/eput
2.
Highlight
SAVE and press ENTER.
selectk)n only (ANT 7 /n the example abovej You can select a di/lYererrtp/brute teode for each/77pt£ select/on
Note: _7/sresetsthe picturessettlhgsk)r the current/hput soureeonly
(ANT _/h thisexarep/e)
, ffyause/ectaneofthe_cteiysetp/bturemodes(SPORTS,
sett/hg (for exnmp/e, the color
_rrlper_ture), the p/brute mode automatically changes
÷
76
HM94(E)07(
-81(8b-UseTV)
76
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
÷
8131/04, 2:44 PM
[
A
÷ [
Adjusting the picture(co.ti..ed)
Using CabJeClear T°DNR (digitaJ noise reduction)
The CableCIear _ digitaI noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be useft11when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially a Cable chanr_el) or pIaying back a video cassette or disc damaged by repeated use.
HDIVII CDI/Ij, ATSC_IE_
7394, mrTddllg/t_#
fTsocJem
To turn on CableClear DNR:
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.
2. HigNight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press
ENTER,
3. Press V to highlight the CABLECLEAR DNR field, and then press _ to seIect AUTO,
Selecting the color temperature
You can change [he quality of the piccttre by selecting tTom three preset coIor temperatures: cool, medium, and warm, as described bdow.
cool blueish
medium neutral warm reddish
To select the color temperature:
1_ Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu_
2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press
ENTER,
3. Press V to
highlight
the COLOR TEMPERATUR_ fidd> and then press _ to select the mode you prefbr (COOL,
MEDIUM, or WARM).
}_Navigate
(_{Select
_Back ®_Exit
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER.
To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
NOTE:
• If the currelTt/nput/sAntel_na, l//cJeo 1, Video 2, o_ g/Ueo 3, the menu will clispk_ythe text "CableCle_S
, /fthe curi_fltir_putis _)e/()fStl_Rf77HD7 of ColofSt/_am HD2, the menu will displg_ythe text "DNR"
, /fthe cur/_t}t input is HDMI or/EEE 7394, the melTu win
d/sJny the text "DN R ' and win be '_qmyedout" ib kldieal_
I'hat the feature Uees ilot fufIct/ef7 b this klptJ£
To turn off CableClear
DNR:
Select OFF in step 3 above.
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER,
To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER,
Resetting the advanced picture settings
To reset the advanced picture settings to their factory values:
1. Press MENU
and
open
the
VIDEO
menu.
2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3. HigNight RESET and press ENTER,
4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER,
÷
77
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV) 77
Copyright @)2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8131/04, 2:44 PM
[
A
÷ L
Usiagthe closed eaptioa mode
The dosed caption mode has two options:
* Capdons_An or>screen display of the diaIogue, Ymrration, and sound efibc[s of'TV programs and videos that are closed captioned (usuaIly marked "CC" in program guides)_
* Tex_ An or>screen display ofirdbrmatiorl no[ related to the current program, such as weather or stock data (when provided by individual stations).
To view captions or text:
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES rueful
2. HighIight CLOSED CAPTION MODE and then press to open the merm sidebar.
3. Press _' to highlight the desired dosed caption mode and then press ENTER.
Advanced closed captions
You can customke the dosed caption display characteristics by charlging the background color and the text size, e/pc, edge, and color.
Note:
This keatute /s avg_#glb/e
To customize the closed captions:
_=_:"
_ _7__
2. IIighligh_ CLOSED
(_APTION ADVANCED and press ENTER.
3, Press 'g or _ to highlight
0',o,,,,'o@.....
_: ....
_2_:_
the characteristic yott want to change, and then press _ _o select the fbrma[ fbr that characteristic.
To temporariIy save the new se_rir_gs,highlight CANCEL and press ENTER.
To pennar_er_tly save the new settings, highlight
SAVE and press ENTER.
To reset the closed caption characteristics:
1. Highlight RESET in step 4 above, and press ENTER.
2. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER. All characteristics are se_ to "AUTO."
* To view captions:
Highlight CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4. (CC1 display._
trar_slation of"the primary language in your area.)
Note:
If tile pmg/_ffrl o_ video you selected is not clcsed
O_lpi'/(JfTeC/, IlO Cr;'pt/OMS
/VI2 cJ/sp/ily 011 sot_ef7
. Toview
text:
EIighligh_T1, T2, T3, or T4.
Note: If text Is not av_,il_h/e isl your at_, a b/aek/ect_lrlw/e
may _ppenr o1_vour screen
ff #_/s happen& turn the Closed
(_'apl'/Of7
Of_-
* To turn off the Closed Caption feature:
Highligh_ OFE
Note: A clcsed c_',pt/o/_siqna/ In
W
not &kplg_y/n the follow/ng s/tu3t/ons
*
When a videotape has been dubbed
"
Wventhe s/igna/teoepl'ion/}
11011
Digita e osedeaptio s
You can use the DigitaI CC/Audio selector
eo
seIec[ digitaI dosed caption services (if"avaiIable), which wilI temporarily override closed captions fbr digital charmels onl> When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio sdeceor presents a de_ult list of'services. If the sdeceed service is not available, the next best service will be used instead.
Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS li)enu.
Highlight DIGITAL
CC/AUDIO
SELECTOR and press
ENTER.
3. Press _ or "_ to highlight the desired service, and then press ENTER.
÷
78
HM94(E)07{ -81(8b-UseTV) 78
Copyright (ct,2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All rights reserved
÷
9/1/04, I1:53 AM
F
A
÷ L
Adjustingthe audio
Muting the sound
Press MUTE
to
partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off
(MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, tile mute mode wiI[ change Jr1tile tbIIowing order.
[_ Normal _ 1/2 MUTE _ MUTE _
If the dosed caption mode is set to OFF when you sdecc
"MUTE" mode, die cIosed caption tbature is automatically activated. To mute the audio without automaticaIIy activating the cIosed capdon feature, use the VOL Y button to sec the rob*me to (L See "Using the closed caption mode" on page 78 fbr more intbrmafion on closed caption modes.
....Z.
- -5
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts
The muM<hatred TV sound (MTS) _bamre allows you to output high-fiddip! stereo sound from your TV's speakers.
MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) contairfing a second language, music, or other audio intbrmafion (when provided by individual stations).
The MTS feature is riot available when the TV is in VIDEO mode
When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word
TEREO or SAP appears on-screen when RECALL is pressed.
To listen to stereo sotmd:
1, Press MENU and open the AUDIO metal
2, Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER,
3, Press Y
to
highlight the MTS field, and then press _
to
sdect STEREO.
Digital audio selector
You can use the Digital CC/Audio steerer
;o
converfiently switch between audio tracks on a digital charred (fbr those cham_ds thac have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily overrides the audio tra& chosen by the language option under
Audio Setup.
1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS metal.
2. Highlight DIGITAL CC/AUDIO SELECTOR and press
ENTER.
3. Press _ or 4
to
highlight the desired service>and then press
ENTER,
4.
To
temporarily save die new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
Note;
• X_uc;_n/eave_<heTVinS7-_REOmodebec_useitautom;_tic_//y
outputs the type of sound beieg bmaUcilst (ste/_o o_monaur;_/)
• ffthe sterne sound/:_ horsy, sdect MONO to r_duce the noise
To listen to all alternate language on an ATSC digitM station
(if"available):
High[ighc the LANGUAGE field it1 seep 3 above, and then press _ to sdect the [anguage you prefer.
To listen to a second audio program on an analog station
(if available):
Sdecc SAP in step 3 above.
Note:
• A second slucliopmgI_m (SAP) c_ln be hea_Uonly on I<ho'_eTV
bnguage _Tsa second aud/o pmg/>Tm ff you have
SAP
Of7 yOU Wi/I
see the current p/ ogmm on rite scs_en but henr the other hllgtJqi9'e k_s_adof
the DfogleFI7 _ ROITT18/aud/o
•
/_yOU
have SAP of 7 afTd the st;/roll
you a_ wo?t.d?/lW is not
WiNbe outpuL Howeve/; oc:casiona//y tlTe/_ is no soui?d at aNb SAP mode ff th/s /l_ppen& set the MT_ Leatum to STEREO mode
79
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV) 79
Copyright _) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8131/04, 2:44 PM
÷
A
÷ L
Adjustingthe audio (co.ti..ed3
Adjusting the audio quality
You can adjust the audio qua_ky by adjusting the bass, treble, and balance.
To adjust the audio quality:
1. Press MENU and open d_e AUDIO men.,
2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
Using the StableSound" feature
The StableSourld °ofbature limits the highest volume levd to prevent extreme changes ir_volume when the signal source changes (fbr example, to prevent d_e sudden increase in volume that <if'tenhappens when a TV program switches to a commerciat).
To turn on the StableSouud _'_featu:e:
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.
2.
Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Press V to highlight STABLE SOUND, and then press _" to select ON,
¢_Select _D_Dar"Back
3, Press V to highIight d_e item )ou want to
TREBLE, or BALANCE).
adjust (BASS,
4_
Press @ or _ to adjust the Md.
@ makes d_e bass or treble weaker or increases the baLmce in the lef'rchamM (depending on the item selected).
* _ makes the bass or treble stronger or ir_creasesd_e balance in the right chamM (depending on the item sdected),
5. To temporariIy save the new seuings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To reset the audio quality to the factory settings:
Highlight RESET in step 5 above, and press ENTER.
The bass and treble are rese_ to 50 arid d_e balance is reset to
O,
_gN_vig_te @Select _i]_Baek _!i_E×it
4. To temporarily sa_e the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanendy sa_e the new seEdngs, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To turu off the StableSouud feature:
Sdect OFF in step 3 above.
Resetting your audio adjustments
The RESET fimctkm returns yo.r audio adjustments to d_e fb[[owing f_ctory settings:
Bass
.............
center (50)
Treble .......... center (50)
Balance ........ center (0)
StableSound _. OFF
To reset your audio adjustmeuts:
1. Press MENU and open d_e AUDIO menu.
2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Press V _o highligtx RESET and press ENTER.
÷
8O
HM94(E)07(
-81(8b-UseTV)
80
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings, highligh_ SAVE and press ENTER.
Copyright tO 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved,
÷
8131/04, 2:44 PM
A
÷ [
Adjustingthe audio (co.ti..e¢
Using the SRS WOW TMsurround sound
WOW is a special combination of SRS Labs audio technologies
(SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a thrilIing surround sound experience with deep, rich bass fl'om stereo sound sources. Your TV's audio will sound fi41er, richer, and wider.
To adiust the WOW settings:
1. Put theTV in STEREO mode (see "Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 79),
2. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.
3. HigNight ADVANCED AUDIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
)
4. Press Y or A to highlight the WOW fbature you want to adjust, and then press 4 or _ to adjust the hem_
3D -- To turn the surround sound effbct on or of'£
Note: If the broadcast/s rnonauf_l,tbe 3D eftectdoesnot wo_?
* Focus -- To turn the vocaI emphasis eff'ect on or off.
TruBass -- To select the desired bass expansion level
(HIGH, LOW, or OFF).
5. To temporarih_ save the new settings highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To reset the WOW settings:
Highlight RESET in the Advanced Audio Settings menu and press ENTER.
Turning off the built=in speakers
Use this fbature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect an audio system to your TV (see "Connecting a digital audio system" and "Connecting an amflog audio system" on page 20).
To turn offthe bui]t4n speakers:
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.
2. Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.
_a
_J ..............................
_ _,, _j _,_, j
3. Press _' to highlight the SPEAKERS rid& and then press _ to sdect OFE
4. To temporarily save the new se_tings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To turn on the built-in speakers:
Select ON in step 3 abo_e.
i{
Selecting the optica a dio output
Use this _bature to select the opdcaI audio output t_._rmatwhen
you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digitaI audio system to the OPTICAL AUDIO OUT jack on the TV (see
'%onnecting a digital audio system" on page 20)_
To select the optical audio output format:
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.
2. HigNight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.
3. Press _' to highlight the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT fidd, and then press _ to sdect either DOLBY DIGITAL or PCM, depending on your device.
÷
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and press ENTER. To permanentIy save the new settings, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
SR.? WOWandthe (@) logo are tmdemad<sof SRSLabs,Inc
SRSWOW
techflo/ogy /s
k_corpo_tedtinder/IbetTsefrom SRSLabs,/no
Copyright @)2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved•
81
HM94(E)O76-81(8b-UseTV) 81
÷
8/31/04, 2:52 PM
[
A
÷ L
Usiagthe meamB,card JPEGpictureviewedNP3 audio player
You can use the memory view card slots on the "IV right side parM to compadbD JPEG flies or play compadbD MP3 flies stored on a memory card (see _Memory card speciflcadorls" bdow and at righG You can display JPEG flies in thumbnail mode or view them as a slide show.
Note:
•
Never remove the memory card or turo off the TV white using the memory
card. Doing so may result in loss of dareror
damage i_) the memo/y ca,al or TV SUCH DAMAGE
IS NOT
COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX
• /t is re,comrl_elTded tbatyou back up your fT?e/y]olycard o';it_l Toshiba iS IlOt /iub/e
tel
arty cl;llTla_le
caused by the use
of
8fl)/
fT?eiT?Ofy
&'?/d
with this TI£ 7bsbiba will not compensate R)r a@/lost o'tltt} or
mcoalieg(s)
caused by the i_se of such cards
• F_)rlbstltJCtlOrTSOl_USlbgyotJrdllglta/ca177efa,
manual hiyour camera f_feftotheol_z,
Tef_
"
mLerto the owner_ ma/lun/ for your memo/y card
. f-T,,ilumto take proper car_ ofa fT_emoly card magi fyP,,veetdliv.s'ayof
pictures or piggybackof MP3 files from the card or result b cJ_mage to tile f77elrlOlyraid or Tk' SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY
YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX
See <'Memolp card care and
handling" of 7paqe 8C
" 27e techsffca/c/7teda set out b this OWl?el_frlant£J ar_ frleallt as a
guide onlJx
• Pe17771ssionlsr_qui/_dborders)dowlT/oadMP3fi/esandrm_sicfmm
the Interact
_)shba has no rT}'ht to grant such pemffssion Pemllssien
shoukJ al_saysbe sought from the cepyi_qht ownei:
[] Naximum disNayaNe J PEG image resolution: 6000x4000 pkds.
[] _ia×imum number of files per directory:
370.
• All files overthe 370th in a single directorywill not display/play,
• Filesin directoriesmore than 10 levelsdown from the top level diledory will riot display/play.
[] Maximum number of files per memory card: JPEG = 1,000;
MP3 = 2OO.
• All JPEGfiles overthe 1,000thon a single memorycardwill riot display,
• All MP3 files overthe 200th on a single memorycardwill not play.
[] J PEG Ncture viewer:
• Thepielure viewer supportsJPEGformat imagesonly,
• Thefiles on your memorycard must be in a file and directory formatcompatiblewith the TV or they will riot displayon the B!
• imagesprocessedarid/or edited on a personalcomputer(PC) may riot displayproperly or at all. Some digitalcamerasmay store imagesin a formatthat is not compatiblewith the Td,
[] _P3 audio pJayer:
• Theaudio playersupporls MP3 formatfifes only,
• Thefiles on your memorycad must be in a file and directory fermatcompatiblewith the 1_/or they will not play.
• Filesprocessedand/or edited on a personalcomputer (PC) may not play properlyor at all. SomeMP3 files maybe in a formatthat is not compatiblewith the TV
• MP3 files musthavethe fellowing format;
- MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3,
- Samplingfrequency-MPEGl: 32 kHz, 44,1kHz 48 kHz,
- Bitrate-MPEGl: 32-320 kbps.
-
Channels-Stereo Joint stereo Dualchannel,Single channel,
ID3\!er, 1 Vel.2,
Nemory card specifications m Supported memory card types:
- ,_-_s,,_,_tM_J,_(3,3V) memory card
-_,;_..
memory card (vet'. 1,0)
-
MMC
(MtlkiMediaCard")
- Memory SficF" (Pro)
- CompactFlash _ memory card (Type 1)
Note:
Tile pictufw viewer af?d auo'ie plgger support FATZ6 tofTnatted
Cr_als
orllj4
(Mei?7of}/cafrJs forrnafted as FAT._2or NTF({ for
example, me ilot suppol_ed) m Naximum memory card capacity: 256
MB,
m Naximum disNayaNe JPEG image size: 8 MB,
Note:
• .JPU5 files/_ffger than 8 MB will not dlsAa_z
• MP3 flies have, no size limit other than the maxFtlum capac£y
of the e_ertloly cnr_Z
_Sm_r'_ed;e iS a registered trademark of ]bshiba Corporation.
_ is a trademark of SD Card Association.
M MC arid MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to M MCA (MultiMediaCard Association).
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
]bshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash _ and CF logo _ registered trademarks.
_
HM94(E}082 87{8c-UseTV} 82
Copyright
tO
2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA] ION. All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/O4, 3:24 PM
/ r
÷
Usiagthe meam card JPEGpicturevbwedNP3 audio Nayer coo.t ..ed
Using the JPEG
picture viewer
Note:
If you stored both ../PEGand IVIP.-_
rTleq_o/y card, the JPFG picture viewe; will sto;t automatica//V when you/nse£ _he memoo/ ca;d isl the TV 7{)st_wt the audio
playel; you f77tJstfiist press EXIT to close the picture viewer and then s_/l? ft_e audio playe/ while the menio;y Cnld is still
bse;ted
See "ib still? the MP:¢ auclio
D/;ijler
whel7 a ITie;T?Oly
c'aK//S all_ady bse;feo', "on p%le 84 You cahoot ose the pictore
glower
and aodfo
player at the same
time.
To v_ew digital photos on your TV:
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the fi'ont of'your
TV.
Note:
memory card
• Never insert more thao one memory
card at one time.
• Be sore to insert
the card correedy
I;@e/skle _'lc'i/ig left e,nd
the end with the ;_otched comer (if applic;_t)leJ irlse/ted irlto the
memoo/ c'a;d slo_
•
When a Cernpnct Rod7 memo/y ca;d is bselled co;7_ctl_ the
_:eotor
btJttOR
pops
out
(see illustmtiorJ bebw)
TV right side par/el
VIDE0:3 IN k_s_r
G)
Memory card slots s_
MMO
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
2.
In a Dw seconds, the images auEornaticaRvdispLU on-screen, with one
asa
L_rgepicture and five in thumbnail f}.)rnlat,
3. Press 4 to rotate the L_rge picture 90 ° counterclockwise.
4. Press _ to roEate the k_rgepicture 9(t° clockwise.
5.
Press A or Y to select another picture as the L_rgepicture,
6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.
f
SmartMedia memory card orb
MMC
(MultiMediaCard)
CompactRash ejector huron
CompactFlash memory card
During the slide show:
To rotate the picture, press _ or 4, and then press ENTER.
* To sdect another image, press A or _', and then press
ENTER.
* To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer, press CH RTN.
To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen, press EXIT.
or
SD
(Secure Digital)
\ memory card
Memory Stick
__J
83
Copyright @ 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)
83
÷
8/31/04, 3:25 PM
[
÷
A
÷ [
Usiagthe memorycard JPEGpictureviewedMP3 audio playercoo.t ..ed3
To set the slide show interval:
Note:
The picture viewer ml_t be closed be/or_ you can set the
slide show klte/ _d
1. Press MENU and open die SETUP menu,
2. Highlight SLIDE S/lOW INTERVAL and press ENTER,
Sdecc die interval from die menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20 seconds).
To close the picture viewer:
Press EXIT to dose the picture viewer and return to the regtdar TV screem
To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still inserted:
1_ Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS menu.
2. Highlight PICTURE VIEWER and press ENTER,
Using the
MP3 audio player
Note:
" If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on tl?e same memo?y cam',
d;e JPEG pietu/_ viewe/ will start automa_b_J/y when you isrselt the memory eafd
isl
the TIll 7b start the audio plajlel; jlau must fi/st press
EX/T _bclose _7?epicture viewer and then st;it? the audio pk_ye/ wl?//e the memoir card is still/nsertecL See "72?steerthe MP3 audio pl,'_yer
when a memoiy card is al?_ady inset-ted,"at r_ql?t You cannot use
the pictore viewer and audio player at the same time°
" While the MP3 auogbplayer/;_ playing
_7?e
VOLUME and MUTE eont/ols can be used: however those on sc/_en d/spklySdo not
_ppear: A/so note that the MUr_ function has tlffee s_ps Cp_ge 782
* &mound, bass, t?_ble, andbahnceadjustmentsshouldbemade befor_ sl?ld/ng tire MP:_ audio p/g{ller:
*
Pernr/ssb/r/sr_qu//edborUe/17JdownbadMP3f//esandnrusfefrom
the Internet 7bshba has no n_'ht to grant
stud?
pemJssion
Pefm/}'_/ols
d/ou/d alw_ys be sot4/ht fepm the c'opy?_qhtowne?:
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is no_ already inserted:
1. Insert a memory card into die approprhte memory card sloc on the tr'onc of your TV (see page 83 for details).
Note:
• Never insert more
tha_ one memory card at o#e time.
• Be sure to #tsert
the card correctly
k_bels/de t'_C/klgleft and the end with the r_otched comer UapphbableJ klserted into
the memo/j/card
slot
• When a Compact Flush memoiy card is/bserted corTectlj/, the
elector button pops out (see page 8D2
2. If you ha_eonly MP3 flies on the memor5 card, d_eaudio
phyer will hunch within
a
few seconds after being inserted and begin playing the first MP3
file
on die memory card.
3. Follow die steps under "Viewing digital photos on your TV" on die pre_ious page.
To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:
1. Press EXIT to dose the picture viewer and return to die regtdar TV screen.
NOTE:
ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE
VIE_I/ER BEFORE REMOVING
THE
/
o _
MEMORY CARD.
and/or savedclaramay be damagecLTHiS TYPEOF DAMAGE
IS NOT COVEREDUNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX
2.
For a CornpactFlash memory card, press the ejector button and then pull die card straight ouc from die TV.
For all odier memory cards, pull die card straight out t}'om the T_.
3. Press ak_ @_ u) navigate to the rewind, pause, thst fbrward, skip backward, and skip tbrward buttons, or to select anodier MP3, and then press ENTER.
÷
HM94(E)082
4
84
Copyright (ct,2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION AN rights reserved
.
9/1/04, I1:59 AM [
S ÷ L
Using the memory card JPEGpicture
viewedMP3 audio player
(continued)
Using the Game Mode feature
Using the MP3 audio pmayer(co.t..ed3
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is already inserted:
1_ Press MENU and open the
APPLICATIONS menu.
2. Highlight AUDIO PLAYER and press ENTER.
Press AY 'q _
;o
navigate to the rewind, pause, fiist f'orward, skip backward, and skip tbrward buttons, and then press ENTER.
To close the MP3 audio player:
Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to tile regular
TV screen.
To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:
1_ Press EXIT to dose the audio player and remm to the regular TV screem
2. For a CompaccFlash memory card, press the ejector bu_Eon and dien pull the card araigh_ ouc from the TV.
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out fl'om the TV.
NOTE:ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO
PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING
THE
,
_" _
MEMORY CARD.
/fpu [emove the memo/ycmd while fdayir_gMP3 file& the cnrd and/or savedcats,,may be damaged THiS TYPEOF DAMAGE
IS NOT COVEREDUNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTX
You can use the Garne Mode tbature fi)r shorter flame delays when playing a video game requiring split-second timing be_veen the on-screen display and input fl'om the controller
(such as music creation and high-acuon games).
Note:
•
_ use the Game Mode feature, the current video hputmustbe
Tile Game Mode ca/lnot be turned ON when afy otis/video
klput is selected
, Whel?a 720p o_ 1080iin/:;utissdected,
the T1/mustbeh_ [\J_tufal
picture size mode (page 692 b om'e_ i_ use Game Mode
•
Whe/ia480ior480phput/sselected, theIVmustbekle/the/
Natural of Full pietu/e size mode (_;age 70) hi of o'er to use Game
Mode
• Game Mode car_notbe used whefl the T1/'/shi TIieaterVdde L
TheatefWide 2, ot TIieatefWide 3 pictu/ e size mode
if:he TV /s in
one of these modes,/twill automal<h;_:@y Ngtuld picture
s/2e ff Game Mode is set to ON
•
Closed cap_/Pns are not awdh_bb wl?ee Game/VhJde is ON
To turn on Game }{ode:
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.
2. Highlight GAME MODE.
3. Press '_'or _ to sdec_ ON and press ENTER.
The TV will swkch to Game Mode when the on-screen display closes.
Note: ff pu adjust the volume or make aW other adjustments
that cat_sea i/-lel?Uo[ on scteefl co/?l?olpane/to d/splg_y,the
Game Mode win be temporarily suspended until the of7 screen
¢;Ioletl ¢_plion ,4_l/_lole_l
iVlemorycard care arid handling
Use index labels made exdusiveIy f))r your specific brand of memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which can cause a malf'unction when the card is inserted or ejected.
If the image does not appear correctly, cIean the metallic area of"the memory card using a sofT,dry, lint-flee, anti-static cloth, and then reinsert the card.
Prevent con_ac_ of"the metilic area
on
the mernory card with dua, dirt, or @her fbreign particIes. Do noc totich the metallic area of"tile memory card with your hands or odlerwise handIe it with anything other than a soft, dr> lint-flee, anti-aade do_h.
NOTE: _shba /s not
h_bhfo_
memo/y catd with this N! _sh/ba w/2ilot compemate/or arly losto%taor
To turn off Game Mode:
Sdec_ OFF in step 3 above or change the video input.
_u caslchaslge
hIput iR8ejlof the kJl/owhlg
>soys
*
pfessfRg/NPUTon the remote cofltie/(pgsge 67);
* d?ailg/ng tile diannd ushlg the Numbers or ON a,71K,OH RTN
or k-AV_/_ buttons;
o pres'_ing TheaterNetDEV/CEonthetemotecorffm/(page44);or o pres'_klg 7-1/GUIDE of 7the tWTIote control (page d_aptef 7)
Copyright O 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
85
HM94(E)O82-87(8c-UseTV) 85
÷
8/31/04, 3:25 PM
[
÷
gettin 9 the ON/OFFtimer
%u can use the ON/OFF timer to turn the TV on and off at a preset time on a recurring basis.
Note: Youm_stfirstsetthetime
(see page 492
To set
the
ON/OFF timer:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.
2. Highlight ON/OFF TIMER and press ENTER.
Setting the sleep timer
You can set the sIeep umer to turn offthe TV after a set length of time (maximum of 3 hours).
The sIeep umer turns off'the TV one dine onl> as opposed to the ON/OFF timer, which turns off the TV on a recurring basis.
To set the sleep timer:
Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until the TV turns offl Each time you press SLEEP, the ume wilI increase in 10-minut:e increments, to a maximum of
180 minutes.
To cancel the sleep timer:
Press SLEEP until k is set to 0.
--SLEEP
3. Press _" to highIight d_e DAY field, and d_en press _ to select the recurrence (weekends, weekdays, e_ery da> etc).
.
Press V to highlight d_e TIME fidd, and then use the
Number buttons to enter the ume you want the TV to tttrn on.
5_
When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press _ to select
AM or PM.
6.
Press V to highIight the TV ON DURATION fidd, and then press _ to select the length ofume until the TV turns oK
7,
Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
8,
"F_irnoff"the _ The TV will turn on amomadcally on the day(s) and at the time you set. The TV wiIl then tam of}" automadcally @er the length of ume you set in the TV
ON DURATION fidd.
Note:
• Wl?ena powe/&ilu/e
occurs, the ON/(?FF time/setthlgs
m_ly
be c'/eg_ted
,
To cl/_p/bythe on time setting, press RE(.;ALL
To turn of_t_e ON/OFF timer:
Sdect NOT SET in step 3 above.
To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP merlu.
2. Press Y to highlight SLEEP TIIv{ER and press ENTER.
_
_
3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length ofdme until the TV rums of_'automaticaIIy.
4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
Note: cleamcZ
• Tocli,_p/by
sleep pless
RECALL
Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
HM94(E)082
6
86 _ 8/31/04, 3:25 PM [
÷
Displaying TV setting Understanding the auto power off
Press RECALL _o display the fb[lowing irdbrmation on-screen:
* Current inptt_ (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)
* If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is _he current ir_p_t_,whether it is
Cable TV ("(-;ABLE")or offair ("TV")
* Cham_e[ rmmber (if in ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)
Time (if se0
Timer seEfings (ifse0
* Remairdng dine on sleep timer (ifseQ
* Remaining time on game timer (if'set)
S_ereo or SAP audio staEtts
S__mp/eRECALL screen
V-Chip rating stactts
* Picture size
* Lamp mode
The TV will automatically turn itsdf off after approximately 15 mirmEes if'it is tuned to a vacant cha*md or a station that comp[e_es its broadcast fbr the da> This feature f:tmctions in
ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes on[y.
Understandingthe last mode memory feature
If the power is cut offwhile you are viewing the TV, the Last
Mode Memory feature automaticMly turns on the TV when the power is resupplied.
NOTE: _)lJ shou/d unplug the TV_ powet cord flit/s possible
that you H42be awny from the fl/ for an extended pe/#)d of t/kne
after the power is [_s?_)f_d
÷
HM94(E)O82-87(8c-UseTV)
87
Copyright _) 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 3:25 PM
87
[
A
÷ [
The LOCKS menu includes the RATING BLOCKING, CHANNELS BLOCK, INPUT LOCK, FRONT PANEL LOCK,
GAblE TIbfER, and NEW PIN CODE fbatures. You can use these fbatures af'_erentering the correct PIN code.
Enteringthe PiN code
1. Press b{ENU and highlight the LOCKS memt icon.
D
if youcannot rememberyour
PiN code
While the PIN code entering screen is disphyed, press RECALL fi.mr times within fi_e seconds. The PIN code will be reseEand you can enter a new PIN code.
@Navigate @Select _Back @;,a_Exit
2. Press Y, which disphys the PIN code entry screen.
The LOCK SYSTEM screen (bdow) appears ira PIN code has nor been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter a new fbur-digit code, enter the code a second time to confirm, and press ENTER.
ChangingyourPiN code
1. Press MENU and highligh_ the LOCKS menu icon.
2, Press Y to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your f'our-digit PIN code and press ENTER,
4. Press Y to highlight NEW PIN CODE and press ENTER,
5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new fbur-digit code,
Reupe the numbers to confirm the PIN code 3x_uentered.
6. Press ENTER, The new PIN code is now active.
The LOCKS ACTIVE screen (bdow) appears if"tI_ePIN code is already stored. Press the Channd Number buttons to enter your fbur-digk code and press ENTER.
_Navigate _Select _Back _!;_S×it
÷
If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message "Incorrec_ PIN code" appears. Highlight RETRY and press ENTER, Enter the code again and press ENTER,
When the correct PIN code is entered, the LOCKS menu opens.
88
HM94(E}08{ -91(9-Locks)
_Navigate
_JSeleet _Back _iExit
88
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA COFtPORA_ ION. All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04, 3:32 PM
[
A
÷ L
Blocking TV programsand moviesbyrating (V-Chip)
Some TV programs and movies ind_tde signals that classiC, the content of the program (videplce, sex, dialog, language). The
V-Chip fba[ure in this TV detects the sigpMs and blocks the programs according to the ratings you sdect. (See the tables at fight fbr rating descriptions.)
#l I'h/s T1Zwhich supports the tJS ¼Chip system only
To block and tmblock TV programs and movies:
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS mepm icon.
2. Press Y. which disp[ays the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press V to highIight ENABLE RATING BLOCFQNG.
5. Press _ and then V [o select ON. and then press ENTER.
&_Navigate _Selecl _#$_Back J_[_r_Exit
6. Press T'
to
highlight EDIT RATING LIMITS and press
ENTER.
#
independent rating system for broadcasters
TV_MA
Mature Audience Only([his programis specificallydesigned to be viewed by adultsand therefore maybe unsuitablefor children under 17.)
L) Crude or indecent language S) ExplicitsexuaJadivity
V} Graphic violence
TV=14
ParentsStronglyCautioned([his programcontainssome materialthat many parentswould find unsuitablefor children under 14yearsof age.)
D} Intenselysuggestivedialog L) Strong,coarseBnguage
S) Intense sexualsituatior/s 'ffj Intenseviolence
TV_PG
ParentalGuidanceSuggested (Thisprogramcontair/s materialparents mayfind unsuitablefor younger children,)
D} Somesuggestivedialog L) Infrequentcoarse language
S) Somesexualsituations V) Moderate violence
TWG
GeneralAudience (Most parentswould find this program suitablefor all ages,)
TWYT,
Directedto OlderChildren (Thisprogramis designed
TWYTFV for children age7 andabove. Note: Programsin which fantasyviolencemay be more intenseor more combative than othel programsin this categoryaredesignated YTFV)
TV_Y
All Children0his program is designedto be appropriatefor all children.)
Independent rating system for movies
@Navigate @Select _i;_Back _;,;£_£xit
The EDIT RATING LIMITS screen (below) appears.
7. Press A'_4 _ and then press ENTER to sdect the Ievd of blocking you pretbr. A box with an "X" is a raring that will be Nocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition fbr the rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See votes _It*'igtJt.
X X-rated (Foradultsonly)
N0=17 Not intendedfor anyone 17and under
R Restrided (Under 17 requiresaccompanyingparentor adul0
PG_13 ParentsStronglyCautioned(Somematerialmaybe inappropriatefor children under 13)
PG
G
ParentalGuidanceSuggested (Somematerialmay not be suitablefor children}
GeneralAudience (Appropriatefor all ages)
8,
When done sdectip_gthe ratings you want to block, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
Note:
, IfyouplHceanXinlT_ebox/lextto"lVoneRHtedofhloRatirlcL"
promTims rated "l\Jofle' or "AIo Ratieg" will be blocked
Howeveg ff
the procuem has no mlYrd bto/rT_ation provided rlothbg will be
displayed irl the ba/lner and r_}lYngsb/oc/@_gwill/lot be b effecL
• F) cl/spl;_ythe/et/_ W of tile prog/s/rl you are watching, press RECALL
o11i'he r_hlote oorlt/o/ flit is Rot fated, the word "NONE" appears
STEREO
TV-PG L V
On Timer: Every Day 6:00am
Sleep Timer: 60 rain,
_
NONE
Every Day 6:00am
Sleep Timer: 80 rain.
HM94(E}088-91(9-Locks) 89
Full 8:09 pm
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 3:32 PM
8g r
÷
A
÷ [
Blocking channels
Unl0ekin
temporarily
Wkh the CHANNELS BLOCK fbature, you can block specific channds. You will not be able to tune locked cham_els unbss you clear the setting first.
To block channels:
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.
2. Press Y, whkh disphys the PIN code entering screem
3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code (see page 88 fbr details).
4. Press Y to highlight CHANNELS BLOCK and then press
ENTER.
If you try to watd_ a TV program that exceeds the rating limits you set, the TV enters program lock mode.
You can ekher unlock the program temporaril) or select a non-locked program to watch.
5. Press AV4 _ to highlight the channel you want to block, then press ENTER, which puts an X in the box next to that channel
To temporarily tmlock the program:
1_ Press MUTE.
2. Enter your four-digk PIN code and press ENTER.
If the correct code is entered, the program Iock mode is released and the normal picture appears. AII locking is disabbd until the TV is turned
off',
when the TV is turned on again.
6. Repeat step 5 tbr other chaimds you want to block.
7. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.
To unlock individuM channels:
In step 5 above, press
AV4 _ to
highlight the chamlel you want to unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the X f'rom the box.
To block all channels at once:
Highfight BLOCK ALL in step 5 above.
To unlock all locked channels at once:
HigNight ALLOW ALL in step 5 above.
Lockingvideoinputs
You can use the INPUT LOCK feature tO lock the _ideo input sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, CobrStream HD-!,
Coh)rStream HD-2, DVUHDCP) and channels 3 and 4.
You wiII not be abb to _iew the inpuE sources or cham_ds unti_ you turn of}'the input lock.
To lock the video inputs:
1. Press btENU and higNight the LOCKS rnenu icon.
2. Press Y to disphy the PIN code entering screem
3. Enter your f'our-digk PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press V to highlight INPUT LOCK and press ENTER.
5. Press Y to sdect the bvd of video input locking you prefer, as described bdow:
--
_
_
_ _,
ColorStream HD !/HD2, and HDbfI.
Y
÷
9O
HM94(E)O8{ -91(9-Locks) 90
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
AN rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04, 3:32 PM
[
A
÷ L
You cai_ use the GameTimer to set a time limit fbr playii_g a video game (3(t-120 mim*tes). Whe*l the GameTimer is activated, the TV e*lters VIDEO LOCK mode aild locks out the iiIput source fi._rthe video game device.
To set the Gan_eTirner'M=
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.
2. Press Y to display the PIN code enterirlg screen.
3. Enter your tbur-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press V to highlight GAME TIMER and press ENTER.
5. Press V to selec[ the length of time until the VIDEO
LOCK is activated (3(},60, 9(} or 12(}minutes) and press
ENTER.
Using the front panel lock feature
You carl lock the front pant touchpad buttons to prevent your settirlgs from being changed accidentally (by children, fbr example). When the f'ront panel lock is ON, norle of the controls on the TV fi'ont touchpad will operate except POWER.
To lock the front panel=
1_ Press MENU and highligh[ the LOCKS merm icon.
2. Press Y to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your t'our-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press _' to highlight FRONT PANEL LOCK.
5. Press _¢ to highlight ON and press ENTER.
To cancel the Gan_eTirner'M:
Select OFF in step 2 above.
To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has activated it:
Set the VIDEO LOCK to OFF on page 9(}).
Note:
(see "Locking video inputs"
" A messagewillappea_on-ser_enwhen 10minutes, 3
minutes,and 1minute f_/TlaiROfltl_eGameTime/:
, ffthe T1/bsespowerwith i'ioletern_ffnkwonthe GameTimeL whenpowet /s restoredthe TVwill e/Tte/VIDEOLO('K
mode, as/fl'he GameT/}Tlethas expi/ed, atldyou will have to
When the front pant is Iocked and a button on the touchpad is pressed, the message "Not Avaibg)le" appears.
To tmlock the front panel=
Highlight OFF in step 2 above, or press and hold the
VOLUME @ button on the TV f?ont pant _br about 10 seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.
TV front touchpad
® @
POWER
VOLUME _l
÷
HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)
Copyright _) 2804 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04, 3:38 PM
91
Beforecallinga seMce technician please check tile fellowing tablefor a possiblecauseof tile problemand somesolutions.
Probmem Solution
TV will not turn on
Picture )roblems o Make sure the power cord is plugged h/and then press POWER.
o The remote control batteries may be dead. Replacethe batteries or try the front par]el buttons o Pressthe RESETbutton on the TV front pane] (page 9) o If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp Llnitand lampunit door are installed properly (pages 98-100) o The ]ampunit may need to be replaced (pages 98-100)Also see "LED indications" on page 94.
o Check the anterlna/cable connections (Chapter 2}.
o PressINPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO or/the TV front panel arid select a valid video ir/put source (page 67), If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the 'FV,no picture will display when you select that palsicular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.
o Anter/na reception may be pool- Use a highly directional outdoor antenr/a (if applicable}.
° The station may have broadcast difficulties. Tryanother channel o Adjust the picture qualities (page 7(_).
o [fyou are using a VCR, make ,_urethe TV/VCRbutton on the remote control is set correctly (page 27) o [fyou have two VCRs connected to your TV,do not connect the same VCR to the TV's output and input connections at the ,_arnetime (page 18).
o Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the W back (or
VIDEO-3 on the ]_/front) at the same time (Chapter 2).
Noisy pk:'turs
Video/nput Selection pr_:,b/ems
o [fyou are watching a tuned analog char/nel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear DN R feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the P,! picture (page 77) o [fthe hlput Selection wir/dow does not appear wher/you press IN PUTon the remote control or
TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel, press IN PUT or TV/V[DEO a second time, which will change to the next video input source and display the InpLJtSelection window
(,_nnot view external signa/s
or channe/ 3 or 4
Black bo'< on screen
o If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDE() 1, VIDEO 2
VIDEO 3 or ColorStream; or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the INPUT LOCK is set to OFF (page 90) o Set the CLOSED CAPTION feature to OFF (page 78}
POOr CO/OF Of 120 CO/OF
POP prob/ems
Memory card problems
° The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel o Adjust the TINT and/or COLOR (page 76}.
o When the ColorStream sigr/al source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive video frorn the VIDEO OUT signal, a starldard video or S-video [N jack must be used instead of the
ColorStream connections.
The VIDEO OUT jack will not output the POP picture (pages 18 and 74)
Make sure you are using a supported or walidmemory card format (page 82}
Make sure you havesaved the picture files in the correct file format (page 82}.
The card may be inserted improperly. Ren/ovethe card and reinsert it (page 82)
The memory card may be empty.
The memory card may be damaged.
÷
92
HM94(E)09_
-97(10-Trbl)
92
Copyright #) 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04,11:43 AM
F
Probmem
Sound problems
Remote control problems
Channel tuning probbms
Closed caption problems
Rating Blocking {V-Chip}1problems
Recording problems
Other problems
somution
Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2}1.
The station raayhave broadcast difficulties Tryanother channel
The sound may be muted. PressVOLU M E.
[fyou hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to STEREOmode {page 79}1
Make sure the SPEAKERSfur/orionin the AUD!O SETUPn/enu is set correctly (page 81}1
If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source make sure the M[S feature is set to SAP mode (page 79}/.
*
[fyOUhear audio tha[ seems "incorrect' for the program you are watching (such as mLisioor a foreign
language}},the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREOmode (page 79}1.
o When using an external audio amplifier,if you connect the amplifier to the VAR AUDIO OUT jacks, the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 20}1.
o Make sure the ten/ore control is set to the correct device mode (page 27}1.
o Ren/ove all o The remo[e control batteries may be dead. Replacethe batteries (page 27}1.
o Your TV remote cor/troJraay no{ operale cedain features on your externaldevice. Referlo the owner's manual for your other device to determine its avaiBble features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature oil another device, use the remote control that came with the device {page 27}1.
o [fthe TV slops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turf/off the 'r'v, press the RESETbutton or/the front panel (see page 9 for detaiB}1.If the TV still does not act as expected use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51 o Make sure the remote conlrol is set to the correct device raode (page 27}1.
o The channel may have beerserased from the channel rneraoryby the CHAN N EL ADD/DELETE feature
Add the channel to the channel memory (page 42}1.
o The channel may be blocked by the CHANNELS BLOCK feature. Unblock the channel {page 90}1.
o [fyou are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 40}. If you are still unable to tune digital channels, dear all channels fi-orn the channel list (page 42}1and reprogram channeb into the channel memol}/(page 41}1 if you are still unabb to tune digital channels use the
Restore Factoly Defaults procedure as described on page 51.
o [fthe program or video you selected is riot closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen
(page 78}.
o [ftext is riot avaiBbb a black rectangle may appear on-screer/[f this flappens, turf/off the closed caption feature (page 78}1 o A closed caption signal may not display correcdy in the following situations: a}1when a videotape has been dubbed; b}1whet/the signal reception is weak; or c}1whet/the signal reception is nonstandard
{page 78}1.
o [fyou forget your PiN code: While the PINcode entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within 5 seconds. The PIN code you stored will be reset (page 88}1.
o The \!-Chip feature is available for the U.S.\!-Chip system only {page 89}.
o If you use the TV's remote control to start recording, you wi]] not be able to change inputs {page 88}1 change channels {page 69}1,open the POPwindow (page 73}1or open the FAVSCAN muki-window
{page 75}1.If you attempt to do so, the message "Not AvailableWhile Recording" will appear on-screen.
o [t is recommended that you use the TV's remote control to start recordir/g. If you use a device other than the TV's remote control to stalt recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied during recording (POPmode FAVSCAN mode, changing inputs, changing channels}1the recorded audio arid/or video may not be what you intended to record. See pages 88, 89, 74, and 75 o [fyou connecteda SymbioAVHD recorder,in order to use its full functionality,you mustfirst set up the TV
GuideOn Screensystem{page 23 and Chapter5}1.
o if your TV's problem has not beersaddressed in this '[_oubleshootir/gsectior/or the recon/mer/ded solution biasno{ worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51.
÷
93
HM94(E}O92-97(10-Trbl)
93
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/O4,11:41 AM r
LEDindications
The green and red LED lights are on die TV f_ont touchpad, m d_e left of"die POWER button,
The green and red LED lights on the TV con[rol touchpad (on the k_wer right corner o[ the TV screen) indicate the TV's curren[ status, as fbllows:
* Green ON (solid) and Red OFF = TV power cord is phigged in but die TV is OFE This is called s_andby mode.
* Red ON (solid) and Green OFF = TV power cord is p_ugged in and the TV is ON.
* Green and Red ON (solid) = TV f'ront touchpad is being pressed.
* Green and/or Red blinking (see table bdow).
TV/V!DEO
EXIT
TV front touchpad
A -1
j Red LED
Green LED
LEE) Indication
1} Green blinks 3 times after power cord
is
plugged
in;
Red
is
O[:[:.
Condition
The TV is warming tap.
Solution
Wail aboul 30 seconds until the Green LED lighls continuously, and then press POWER to turn ON the TV
2} Green is ON (solid};
Red blinks continuously at 0.5-second intervals,
The lamp unit door is not seated Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review "How to properly, replace the lamp unit" on pages 99-100 to ensure that the lamp unit door is installed securely If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba
Authorized Service Center.
3} Green blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly.
The TV automatically will try to restart itsel[ eight times (see item #4}.
at 0.3-second intervals;
Red is ON (solid}.
4} Green and Red blink continuously at
1-second intervals.
5} Green and Red blink
3 times only.
6} Green is
O[:[:;
Red blinks conlinuously at 0.5-second intervals,
The lamp is not working properly Turn OFF the TV and then ON again. If the problem persists, replace aker the eighth automatic restart the lamp unit (see pages 98-100}. If the problem still persists,
(see item #3).
contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
An abnormal temperature increase has occurred.
Turn OFF the TV Check to make sure all slots and openings in the
TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusly Turn ON the TV again.
If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
The TV requires servicing.
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord in again and turn ON the TV If the problem persists, conlact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
÷
94
HM94(E)09_ -97(10-Trbl) 94
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
8/31/04,11:37 AM [
A
÷ L
TVGuideOn Screen:":FAQs
The }blk_wingare _equen@ asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen system.The answers represent the most likely sohltions to the problem_
SETUP
1. Q: What ifI move and my ZIP code or postal code changes?
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbght
(FLANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Folk_wthe on-screen prompts to enter new infbrmation (see Chapter 3 ff_rdetails). It can take tip to
24 hours to receive new data.
7. Q! I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial setup of the TV Guide On Screen system again?
A: No. The in_brmation )<m entered is stored in the TV Guide
(.)11 Screen sysgeln meluoQs
Note: Fbr ('ub/e box use_, tile TVmustbe OFFand llTe&_ble
f_c'e/ved?ailnd l/rle up/rTforma_brs
2. Q! What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice
versa?
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbght
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input iuf'ormation and tuscan channels [br the new input
(see Chapter 3
_br details).
8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable to the
G-LINK _' input on the 17_7?
A: See Chapter 2: (onnecting your TV iu this mauuaL
You also cast reigcr to the TV Guide On Screen prompts during V(;R or Cable box setup.
9. Q: When will I be able m view myTV program listings and use other TV Guide On Screen system features?
A: TheTV Guide On Screen Ustem will be ready igoruse wkhin 24 hours oiginitial setup.
3. Q! What ifI change cable boxes?
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press _r to higbbght
(HANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Follow die on-screen prompts to enter new input inigormationand rcscan channds fbr die new input
(see Chapter 3 }br derails).
10. Q: What should I do JigI cannot complete initial setup?
A: Iigyou are unable to complete initial setup using the owner's man ual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshib£s
National Service Diqsion at 1-800-631-3811.
4. Q! I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable,
What do I do?
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press V to higbbgbt
(FLANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER. Folk_wthe on-screen prompts to enter new input iuf'orma_ion and tuscan channels [br the new input
(see (hap_er 3 _br derails).
11. Q: IigI make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to the previous step?
A: Complete the remaining setup seeps. When "Confirming
Your Settings" appears, sdect "No, repeat setup process."
Follow the on-screen prompts aud input the correct information.
5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I change my Setup inigormation?
A: Highlight SETUP in the Serqce Bar. Press V to higbbght
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new in_brmation (see Chapter 3 igordetails). It can take tip to
24 hours to receive new data.
12. Q: What iigthe channel number is not visible on my cable box?
A: Your calde box may be def_mking to a dock or time display once the channel changes. Watch the box careig_dlywhen testing the cable box brand code to see Jigthe chaunel changes to 09.
6. Q! Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide
On Screen system to be ready igor use?
A: The inidal setup process consists oig_nding the s_acions in
)<_urarea that carry the TV Guide On Screen system data and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and listings data.
13. Q: Why won't myVCR turn on?
A: There are several possibilities: a) An incorrect or
"no
VCR" code was entered during the
TV Guide On Screen inidal setup. Press the GUIDE button on the remote control, and then press _ to highlight SETUR Press V to highlight '<Change system settings," and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct VCR inigormation.
b) Make sure the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable is connected coffee@ (see page 25).
c) The V(R record timer is on. Turn off the timer.
d)
The wired remote
VtTR
is incompatible.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
95
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl) 95
÷
8/31/04,11:37 AM
[
÷
S ÷ L
TV GuideOn Screen FAQs(co.ti..ed)
CHANNEL
LINE-UPS & LiSTiNGS
14. Q: Why aren't all my channels initially displayed?
A: Ai}er initia_ setup, approximatdy 120 chmmds are automatically displa),cd. The user may use the "Change channd display" t'camre to turn ON or OFF addkional chamlds.
Note: Eventholuh
you
havethe opt/on of on&ring maw
mo[_ d?anne/s,the sJstemmay not have the memory capacity to hok/ det_li/edp/og/_un
(Jesc/fp?'/OfIS for all of them
15, Q: When 1[opened the _[%rGuide On Screen system, 1[was asked to choose from more than one channd lineup.
What should I do?
A: Sdect the lineup that most dosdy matches the one _'oryour area. If'af}er ),ou choose the lineup, you w:uKto make changes to k, hig}iight SETUP in the Service Bar.Press _r to sdect CHANGE CHANNEL DISPLAY,Fallow the on-screen insgr ucgions.
16. Q; Why do all my channels display "No Listing?"
A: The TV Guide On Screen system has not yet received ks data downh_ad. The phrase "No Listings' will be replaced wkh program in_'ormation during the next downh_ad cycle, which <11 occur within the next 24-hour period.
17. Q; Why do some of my channels display "No Listing?"
A: There are several possibilities: a) The channds in question were rece*K1yturned ()N (in
Change channd display) and TV Guide On Screen }*asyet to receive ks next data downh_ad.
b) After completing the inkial setup, the first data downh)ad of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.
c) The TV power cord svas [eff unphiggcd f'or an extended period of time and the TV Guide On Screen system was unalde to receive program _istings during the sched tded download c)'de.
d) Poor reception caused mine of the data to be missed.
e) The calde bo× was turned OFE The TV power cord mus_ be pMgged in and the cable box must be ON.
g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFE If the connection includes stereo caldes with calde box to VCR and stereo connection t}om VCR to tdeqsion, the V(R mus[ be ON.
18. Q: A show entry in the _%r Guide On Screen system reads
"No Listing°" What does that mean?
A: Show inR_rmation t'_r that entry was not av:iaNe during the last TV Guide
On
Screen syaem in_'ormation update
(downh_ad).
Show
inf'ormation is updated on a daily basis.
19, Q; I have seen the word "download" in reference to the
_W
Gnlde On Screen system.
What does that mean?
A: "Downh_ad" rdcrs to the times throughout the day when the TV Guide ()n Semen system is r_'ceiuh_gchannd and listings M'ormation f}om your Cable or over-the-air antenna transmission,
96
20, Q: After some show titles, ][have noticed from 1 to 4 stars
(****)° What does that mean?
A: These stars are a broadcas_-ind ustry ratings system used to inform you of a show's qualiDs The more stars, the better the rating.
21, Q; What do the colors for shows in 6e Listings and Search screens indicate?
A: Green = Sports; Dark Bhle : Children's; Purple : Movies;
]%al : Other Show.
22, Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of channels on the _[Nr Guide On Screen system?
A: See the "Change chmmel display" section in the TV Guide
On Screen owner's mammk
23, Q: Why are some of my channels listed on 6e wrong nnmber?
A: There are several possibilities: a) Incorrect channd lineup was sdec:ed. Access "Change system settings" and choose "Yes, but my channd _ineup is incorrect," and then resdec_ the corrcc_ lineup.
b) ( hannd line-up changes have not yet been processed. Use the "Change channd display" feature to make adjustments.
c) Initial setup was done incorrcc@ (that is, the wrong
ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.
24, Q: Why doesn't the program highlighted match up with the video window on my TV screen?
A: There are several possibilities: a) The stadon in quesdon made a _ate change to its schedtded program lisdng and the
TV
Guide
On
Screen system has not )'el been updated.
b) TheTV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or boosted ante*ma system or a satellite dish (not supported by the TV Guide On Screen system).
c) Initial setup was done incorrecd> (i.e., the wrong
ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.
d) Incorrect channd lineup was sdected. Access "Change system settings" and choose "Yes, but my chmmd lineup is incorrect," and then rcsdect the correct lineup0 e) The qdeo window may be h)cked. Press SPLIT to tudock.
25, Q!
(]an 1[move my law)rite stations m the top of the _W-
Gnlde On Screen display screen?
A: Yes. Use the 'Change chamld displa3/' f'camre to make adjustments.
Highlight the station call letters to be mewed, therl use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
HM94(E)09_
-g7(10-Trbl)
96
÷
8/31/04,11:37 AM r
÷
A
÷ L
OPERATIONS
26_ Q; How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide
On Screen system?
A: SEARCH lets you find shows by category (Alphabetical,
HDTV, Mm.'ies, Sports, Children, Educational, News,
_trieg¢, Series) or by Ke).avoN.
27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the
'PC Guide On Screen system° What_ wrong?
A: There arc several possibilities: a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide
On Screen inidal setup. Redo initial setup.
b) The G-LINK (IR ]dasher) cable may not be connected properly (see page 25).
c) The calde box has no remote capabfli V and is incompatible.
28. Q: How do I reslze or close the Info window?
A: Press the INFO button on the remote contro[ to resize the
Info window. Press the INFO button again to dose the
Infb window.
2% Q: Is there a way m go directly to the next day_ listings without scrolling through each time slot?
A: Yes. Highlight the station you want to look ahead, use the
Channd Number buttons on the remote control to enter
"24," and then press MENU.
In the resuking menu, press V two times to scroll down to select the HOURS
AHEAD option, and then press ENTER.
30. Q: Why can't I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue screen.
A: There are severn[ possibilities (without a calde box): a) The recording unit was not connected or set tip correcd> b) The incorrect channd lineup was sdec_ed. Press GUIDE and then _ to highlight SETUP. Press V to high[ight
"Change us_em settings," and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to selec_ the correc_ channd lineup.
OPERATIONS
{continued)
31. Q: Why won't my VCR change channels and why does it change to the wrong channel?
A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box): a) The VCR is no_ set on the correct output channel Set the
VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channd is set by your cable system.
b) The VCR and/or calde box are hooked up incorrecd)_
Refer to )<uir VCR owner's manua_ or contac_ )cult Calde
TV company for proper wiring procedures.
32. Q: Is Help available in the _V Gnlde On Screen system?
If so, how do I find it?
A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO key on the remote control An expanded Info Box displap additional hdp information.
Press INFO again to dose the box
Hdp is a_soavailablein a panel menu. Press INFO m display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to dose die box.
RECORD/RENRND
33. Q: (;an I tune m a different channel while recording a program?
A: No.
34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in the GUH)E?
A: There is no _imi_to the number of shows that can be programmed into the schedu_ememopi_
35. Q: Ira program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular basis, does it count as five?
A: No, whether a program is schedu[ed ONCE,
REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in the RECORD stack memor)c
36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the recorded shows I have already programmed?
A: The start times and channd numbers of shows that have been programmed will be retained in the memo U of the
TV Guide On Screen system. Titles will listings are restored.
3Z Q: (;an I set a Record or Remind event without highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen system?
A: Yes.TV Guide On Screen has a Manua_ Record and
Remind fcaturc_ Highlight
SCHEDULE
in the Service Bar, and press MENU.
Choose the m_ent type, press ENTER, and then enter the date, start and s_op time, channe_ numbe_; and so f[_rth.
38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?
A: Once--records/reminds the show one time.
Daily (manual only)--records the time, channel, input, recorder combination Monday through Frida)<
Regularl)_ records/reminds the show every time the show airs on the same channd and starts at the same time.
Weekl)_ records/reminds the show each time the show airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and starts at the same time.
Off (no_cancd)--keeps the show in the list but will no_ record/remind the show until the t}equency is changed.
Copyright@ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved,
97
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl) 97
÷
8/31/04,11:37 AM
[
÷
A
÷
4
Lampunit replacement and care
Repmacing the mampunit
(User-replaceable component)
_
WARNING:
RiSK OF
REMOVETV COVERS,EXCEPTAS SPECiFiED
HEREIN. REFERALL SERViCiNGNOTSPECiFiEDiN
THiS MANUAL TOQUALiFiEDSERVICEPERSONNEL,
Failureto foilow this WARNINGmay resuk in death or serious
injuly.
The ligh_ source tbr this TV is a mercury kunp with imernal ammspheric pressure that increases during use. Tile lamp has a limited service lifb that varies depending on product use and user settings,
As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service 1rib and will generally decrease over time. The average useful service lifb fbr the lamp is approximatdy
8,(t(t(t hours in LOW POWER mode or 6,(}(t(} hours in HI BRIGHT mode.
See "Sdec@lg the
Lamp mode" on page 72 tbr intbrmatkm on switching the lamp mode_ Because these are averages, some lamps will require eadier replacement,
Note : The/amp is warmn/ed on/y far #re perioc/sand to the
extent set forth in the Limited
[/VafTant# app/k;ab/eta /his set;
which is a subs/antia//yshofter pefiad of time than t/re average
usefu/ serwbeperiod See "Limited United Stal_s
[/_#fTanty"
OR
page m2 or "Limited Canar/aWan_nty"on page mA as applit-able
If you use the lamp beyond its service life:
3_m may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brighmess of the picture; and the st-rengdl of the quarre
grass
in the Iamp wilI be reduced and tile lamp may rupture (ofien making a loud noise when this happens).
If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate until tile lamp unit is replaced.
securelyinside the/arep urli_
CAUTmON: Always handle the lamp unit with care.
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by consumers; however,if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional abuse (such asexcessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets}, the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.
When to reNace the mampuNt
You should replace the lamp unit:
" if'the picture darkens and/or cok)rs fi_de; if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3, page
94); or if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indicaion #3, page 94),
To obtain a replacement lamp unit:
In the U.S.:
In warranty www.tacp.toehibaocom/service
Out of warranty www.ceaccesseries.toehibaocom
Call toIFfree
1-800-631-3811.
Consult your consumer electronics dealer for availability,
In Canada:
Contacta [bsbiba paresdistributor by directing your web browser to www.toshiba°ea. Click"Home Entertainment,"and then dick
"Support,"
Use the replacement lamp unit model listed below only.
Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV and/or lamp.
type lamp unit: Nodem No, TB25-LMP
(Stock no,
23311083}
HM94(E)098
8
98
Copyright @ 2084 TOSHIBA CORPORA_[ON.
All rights reserved,
_ 8/31/04, 11 :59 AM [
L
÷
A
÷ L
Lampunit replacement and care
How to repJace the Jamp unit
z_ WAF{NING: RISK OF
TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF ELECTRICSHOCK, NEVER
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPEC|FJED
HEREIN, REFER ALL SERViCiNG NOT SPECiFiED iN
THiS MANUAL TO QUALiFiED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Failure to follow this WARNING may resuk Jndeath or serious injul%
Required tools: Manua_ Philips screwdriver; g_o_as.
Opdona_ tad: 5/32" or 4ram AHen wrench.
1.
Thin off'the
TV and unphg d_e power cord,
....
WAR_I_: Eye damage may result from
, directly viewing the light pradaeed by this
\,, tamp, Always turn off the TV and LInpfflgthe power cord before opening the lamp unit door.
4. Using a manual Philips screwdriver,_oosenthe rsvoscrewson the hmp unit.
Lamp unit screws
WARNING:
RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK!
The lampunit door is providedwith an
]
interlockto reducethe risk of electricshock and excessive to service without removingthe lamp unit door completely. Failureto follow this WARNINGmay result in death or seriousinjury.
2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (I) hater bd_re replacing
it.
5.
Grasp the Iamp unit haildle and gendy pul the hmp mlit smflght our of the _ Set the
(lid
hmp unh aside (see
"Disposirg of the used hmp unit" oil page 100).
/
Touching the lamp before it has cooled will resuRin severe barns, ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR
AT
LEAST ONE
(1)
HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.
3.
Oil the Limp unit door oil the side of'd_e TV, bosen d_e d_unlb screw by hand or by using a 5/32" or 4ram Allen wrench, and then remove the hmp unit door.
TV back
Note: Wear gloves when replacing the tamp unR.
Lamp unit door detail
Thumb screw
99
HM94(E}098-105(11-App)
99
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04,12:00 PM r
÷
A
÷ [
Lampunit replacement and care (co.t . ed}
HOw tO replace the lamp unit (continued:)
8,
Ream_ch the hmp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks
on the left side of the hmp unit door inside the opening in the TV cabinet.
6, Carefully insert the new hrnp unk straight into the IV untl it is
_uly
seated,
Lamp unit door
9, Rephce the thurnb screw and hand<ighten,
Note
:
* Neversubjeetthel_,npan/tto excess/_shonk
° Never i_>uchtire &np u/fit gloss or otherw£e get it dir{/
Doir W so rn;!y affect the image qua@ and rnduce the service/fie of the @np .lee "C/eauing the lamp unit gk_ss" beJow
__ H __
CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS if you accidentahytouch the lamp unit glassor otherwise get it dirty,wipe it with a lnt-free lenscleaningcloth (such as a cloth for cleaningcamera lensesor eyeglasses],
_UTJO_: of
I_EVER clean a hot lamp with
® cleaning agent.
Many ordinary cleaning agents
[such as glass cleaners) contain cl_em_catsthat may De flammable _t certain ten2eratures, it me la_ p unit is not atfowed to cool for at least one (1) hour. such cnemtcas may _gmte.
Lamp unit door
_OTE -"Make sure the lamp unit door is installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not turn on.
10.
Ph*gin the power cord and turn on the T_ After the initial warmup period (which rnay take severalsecunds fbr f:dl picture brighmess), the TV should operate r_orrnal> Ira W of the fblosving cunditions exist, turn off the TV, unphlg the power cord, and repea_s_eps 1-9 to ensure tha_ the hrnp unit and hrnp unit door are instaled correctly:
. No picture o Dark picune " TV wil not turn on
If', af'terrepeating s;eps 1-9, the problem stil exists:
In the U.S. call Cus_on_erService a_ 1-800-631-3811.
In Canada, locate the nearest Toshiba aud_orized service depot
by
directing 7)ur web browser _o www._oshiba.ca; dick "Home Entertainment," and then click ;_Support,"
7,
Using a rnanua[ Philips screwdrh'er, tighten the v,vo hrnp unk screws.
Note: Hand-tighten
only. Do not use an electric scrnwdrwer:
Lamp unit screws
(use manual Phillips screwdriver only)
NOT[ : Makesure the lampunit andscrews are installedsecurely;otherwise,the TV may not turn on andthe lamplife may beshortened.
Disposing of the used lamp
unit
" Phce the usedhmp unit in the ernpg, box from the new unit,
, Keep the hrnp unit unt of reachof chtdren and pets,
OA[JTJON: Always handle the lamp unit with care.
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacenlent by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.
Dispose of the used hrnp unit by the approved method for
}x_ur area
NOTF : The lamp unitcontains mercury.Disposalof mercurymay be regulateddue to environmentalc0nsideral0ns. For disposal or
Alliance(vwvw.eiaeorg},
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
A/rights reserved,
HM94(E)098
100
100 _ 8/31/04, 12:00 PM [
÷
A
÷ [
NOTE:
, This model comp;ies
with
the specifications listed
below.
, Designs and specifications ale subject
, This model may
not he compatible
with to change
features without
a#d/or
notice.
specifications that may be added
#l the h_tureo
Television System
NTSC standard
ATSC standard (8VSB)
Digital Cable (64 ()._AM256 QAM; in-the-dear, unencrypted*)
Chamtel Coverage
VHF: 2 through 11
UHF: 14 through 69
Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-I, A through I)
Super band (J through W)
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 125)
Power Source
120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
250 W (average)
45 W in standby mode (power cord plugged in arrd power OFF)
Audio Power
15W+IhW
_EITc'l_gy_e(J
chsflTftU?
c'af?/)_
IlSlllJ a
Vlewe(J OR this
7V
&_bleCARDSeep_,qe72hotUetails
Speaker Type
Main: Two 4-inch
(10cm)
round
Tweeter: Two 1-5/8-inch (4cm) round
Video/Audlo TermlnaJs
S-VIDEO INPUT:
Y : I V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% moduhtion equivtlent,
22 k ohm or greater)
ColorStream _'(component video) HD INPUT:
Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohnr
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 obnr
PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 obnr
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k olun or greater
Suggested resolutions: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
Video/Audlo Terminals (continued)
HDMI _"INPUT:
HDMI compliant (type A connector)
HDCP compliant
E-EDID** compliant
Suggested scan rates: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling fi:equency; 16/20/24 bits per sample
NOTE: _?ls
iV
UoesglotproviUeHFJM!OUTPU7_
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also fbr recording):
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 obn], negative sync.
AIJDIO: 150 mV(rnrs) (30% modulation equivJent,
2.2 k ohm or Jess)
VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:
0.300 mV(rnrs) (30% moduhtion equivalent,
2.2 k ohm or Jess)
G-LINK '' and IR OUTPUT:
3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mona socket (IR blaster cables supplied)
IEEE-1394 INPUT/OUTPUT;
IEEE- 1394 compliant
DIGITAl, AUDIO OUTPUT;
Optical type
Dimensions
46HM94:
52HM94:
62HM94:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Width:
Hdgbt:
Depth:
53-1/8 inches (1664 ram)
31-13/16 inches (808 nrm)
15-1/4 inches (387 ram)
58-3/8 it]cbes (1483 ram)
35-1/16 inches (891 ram)
15-1/4 inches (387 ram)
67-1/16 inches (17{)3 nrm)
40-15/16 irrches (1040 nmr)
18-3/16 inches (462 ram)
Weight
46HM94:78 lbs (35.38 kg)
52HM94:83 lbs (37.65 kg)
62HM94:99 lbs (44.90 kg)
Supplled Accessories
* Two dual-wand IR blaster cables
* Remote corrtro[ with two size <<AA"alkaline batteries
OptlonaJ Stands:
46HM94:ST4694 or ST4684
52HM94:ST5294 or ST5284
62HM94:ST6294 or ST6284
** E EDID Enhanced Extended Display Identification
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, AN rights reserved. 1{)1
HM94(E)O98-105(11-App) 101
÷
11/3/04,10:55 AM
[
÷
Limited United States Warranty
for DLP Television Models
]oshiba America Consumer Produets, LLC ("]XCP"} makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the Urfited States
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR
TRANSFEREE.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED iN THE U.S.A. ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*
TACP waRants this DLP television and its pairs against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP'S OPTION,
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR
LABOR. TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will come to your home when warranly 8elvice is required Depending on the type of repair requiled, either the service will be performed in your home or the set will be taken to the TACP Autholized Selvice Station fol repail and leturned to your hoa/e at no COSt to yOU
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*
TACP waRant8 the lamp unit in this DLP television against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of ouginal retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, ,ATTACP'S
OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR
CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED
UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit i8 a user replaceable component
Rental Units
The warrar_ty fol rer_taltlnit8, inoklding the lamp units contair_edtherein.
begins with the date of first rental or thhly (30) days from the date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes fhet,
*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units rACP wan_antsDLP televisions, including the lamp units contained therein, sold and used for commereial purposes as follows: all paisa are warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) clays after the date of oFiginalpurchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT
TACP'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW
OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.
Owner's IVlanua_ and Pradnct Registration
Read this owner's manual thoFoughly before opelating this DLP television
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your product online at wwwotaep°toshiba°com/serviee as soon as possible
By registering your product you will enable TACPto bring you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the Consumer Product
Safety Act, Failureto register your product does not diminish your warranty rights
Yenr Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1) "_oun/list provide your bill of sale or other proof of pLirohase
(2} All warranly servicing of this DLP television must be performed by an
Authorized TACP Service Station
(3} these warranties flora TACPare effBCtiveonly if the DLP television is pulshased and operated in the LISA. or Puello Rieo
(4) Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of oustolner controls, and instaflation or repair of antenr_a 8ystea/8 are not coveled by these warranties, Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility
(5} Warranties extend only to defects in matelials or workmar_ship as limited above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the D LP television OFparts eaused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or fiuctuatiorm in electlic power}, improper installation, improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP: use or inalfunction thlough simultaneous use of this ploduct and connected equipment; el to LInit8that have been modified or had the serial nunlber removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If. after following all of the operating instructions in this inanaal and cheekir_g the "]roubleshooting" 8eclion, you find that selviee is needed;
(1) ]o find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station. visit TACP's web site at wwwotaep.teshiba°eora/serviee
3811 oF call toll free I 800 631
(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the Authorized
Service Station
For additional
information,
visit TACP's web site:
www.taep.toshiba.eomo
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE
U.S.A., INCLUDING THE iMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES iMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATEOF THE U.S.A. AS
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY iS EXCLUSIVE AND
iN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,
AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFIT{-;,BUSINESS
iNTERRUPTION. OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS
PRODUCT).
No person, agent, distributol, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modity, or extend the terms of these waRanties in any manner whatsoever
The time within which aetion must be commenced to enforce any obligation of FACP arising under this warranty o_ under any law of the United States or of any state theFeof is heFeby limited to 90 clays from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect This lia/itation does not apply to implied wauentie8 arising under the law of any state of the U,SA,
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATETO
STATEIN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,
LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN ACTION MAY BE
BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH
CIRCUMSTANCES.
0804
Copyright (0 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved,
HM94(E)098
102
102 _ 8/31/04, 12:00 PM [
÷
Limited Canada Warranty for DLP Television IViodeis
]oshiba of Canada Limited ("TCL"] makes the following B/lited warranties to origh-_a[consumers in Canada
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORiGiNAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED iN CANADA ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Limited One (t}
Rentam Units
*Limited
Owner's rights
Warranty
Manual
Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*
TCL warrants this DLP television television and its parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, ,ATTCES
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR
LABOR. TCL Authorized SepAce Depot personnel will come to your home when warranty selvice is required Depending or] the type of repair requiled, either the service will be pel%la/ed in your home ol the set will be taken to the TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100
KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.
Limited One (1} Year Warranty on Lamp Unit _ fCL wanants the ]amp unit in this DLP television against defects in matedab o_ workmanship for a period of one (1} year after the date of ouginal retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCLiS OPTION,
EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR
CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED
UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user replaceabb component.
The warlar_ty for rental units, inckldir_gthe ]amp units contah-_edtherein.
begins with the date of first rental or thhly (30} days flom the date of shipment to the rental fhm, wMchever eomes fhst for Comraerciam Units
FCL warrants DLP televisions, h-_cludingthe ]amp ur/its car_tained therein.
sold and used for commercial purposes as fo,ows: all parts are warranted against defects in matedab or workmanship for a period of ninety (90} days after the date of original purchase DURING THiS PERIOD, TCL WILL,
AT TCL'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A
NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE
SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN }O0 KILOMETERS OF AN
AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.
and Product Registration
Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating this DLP television
Register your product online at www.toshibaoca
as soon as possible By registering your product you will enable TCL bring you new products specifically designed to meet yoLu needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required ur_derthe Consumer Product
Safety Act. Failureto register your product does not diminish your warranty
Ynur RespensibiJity
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1] You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of pLucbase
(2] All warlanty sep/icing of this DLP television must be pedormed by an
Authorized FCL Service Depot.
(3} These warlanties from TCL are effective only if the DLP television is purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL deabr and operated in
Canada
(4} Labor eharges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls, and installation or repair of anterg]a systea/s are not covered by these warranties, Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility
(5} Warranties extend only to defects in materials or wol-kmansbip as limited above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the television or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightrfing or fiuctuatior_s in electrie powe0, hT/proper irlstallation, imploper maintenance, or use in violation of instructior/s furnished by TCL: use or malfunction through shmlltar_eous use of this product and connected equipment: or to units that have been modified or bad the serial number removed, akered.
defaced, or _endered illegible
Now to Obtain Warranty Services
Ill after following aHof the operating instructbns in this manual and cheek[rig the "lroublesbooting" section, you find that service is needed:
(1} ]o find the nearest TCL Autbonzed Service Depot. visit TCL's web site at
WWWotOShiba.cao
(2] Present your bill of sale or other proof of purehase to the Autbodzed
Service Depot
For additiona_ information, visit TCL's web site:
www.toshiba.ca
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF
CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA
AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,
AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF
RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT].
No persor/, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modity, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever
The time within which action must be commenced to enforee any obligation of TCL arising under this warranty or under any law of Canada or of any plovince thereof is hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the detect. This limitation does not apply to in@lied warrarlties arising urlder the law of any province of Canada
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
PROVINCE TO PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY, LIMITATIONS ON THE TiME WITHIN WHICH AN
ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
0804
Copyright @ 2004 tOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
103
HM94(E}098-105(11-App) 103
÷
8/31/(34,12:00 PM r
÷
÷
104
HM94(E)098 105(11-App) 104
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:00 PM
F
HM94(E)098-105(11-App) 105
Copyright @?2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION, All rights reserved.
8/31/04,12:00 PM
105
[
÷
A
A/V receiver connection ........................................................
EFGHJJ
B
Blocking channels ....................................................................
O
Cable box connection ......................................................
G-LINK connection .................................................................
HDMI connection ....................................................................
Camcorder connection ...........................................................
Channel Number buttons .....................................................
Channel programming:
Automatic programming ..................................................
Installation, care, and service .......................................
Installation, setup ........................................................................
Integrated digital tuning ...........................................................
Color temperature ....................................................................
Connecting devices ..........................................................
Component video cables ......................................................
Component video (CotorStream _} ..............................
CrystalScan HDSC ......................................................................
B
Device connections ..........................................................
L
Lamp unit replacement ................................................
Language selection .................................................................
Channels, blocking .............................................................
Enable rating blocking ......................................................
Double-window POP feature ...............................................
DTV receiver connection .......................................................
Unlocking programs temporarily ..................................
÷
HM94(E)106
106
106
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORA]ION.
All rights reserved.
÷
8/31/04,12:09 PM r
M
S
Safety, care, instalIation, and service .............................
Satellite receiver connection ...............................................
SD (Secure DigitaP'} memory' cards ................................
OPQ
Picture adjustments:
Color temperature ...............................................................
Picture-out-picture (POP}:
Sound quality adjustments ...................................................
Specifications ...........................................................................
T
TheaterNeP' DEVICE and CONTROL buttons .............45
TheaterNet connection ..........................................................
R
Remote control:
Battery' installation ..............................................................
Operational feature reset .................................................
Troubleshooting .................................................................
V
V-Chip bIocking (Locks menu) ....................................
VCR connection .................................................................
W
÷
HM94(E)106-107(Index)
1o7
Copyri9ht © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPOBATION, All ri9hts reserved,
÷
8/31/04,12:09 PM
107
F
TOSH|BA A_ER|CA CONSUMER
HEAD OmCE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, USA.
NATIONAL SERVICEDMSJON:1420 B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, USA
PRODUCTSj
TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD,
HEAD OFFICE:191 McNABB STREEL MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, DANADA TEL: (905} 470 5/#00
SERVICECENTERS:
TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET,MARKEJAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA TEL: (905) 470 5400
MONTREAL: 18O5OTRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA TEL: (51a) 390-7766
VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOODWAY, RICHMOND, BC, V6W lJ5, CANADA TEL: (60a) 303 2500
MANUFACTURED BY
TOgNJBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCT5_
L,L,C,
ColorStream, FST PURE StabieSound, and TheaterWkte are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, LLC
CabbCiear, GameThner, SurfLock Symbio, arid TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Plx>ducts,LLC
SmartMedia is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation
L,L,C,
HM94(E)108
PRINTEDIN USA
(o4q 0 (RO
108
Copyright @ 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
All rights reserved,
_ 11/3/04,10:40 AM r
÷
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement